Home

here

1. 2 Select Flash control Image quality Under the 31 tab select Flash spas control then press lt i gt Release shutter without card ON i Image review SEC Lens aberration correction Red eye reduc Disable Flash control Flash control 3 Select Evaluative Flash firing Enable e For E TTL Il meter select E TTL l meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO Evaluative then press lt a 231 Easy Wireless Flash Shooting OO E Flash control Select Built in flash settings Flash firing Enable Select Built in flash settings then E TTL i meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode ALTO press lt GE gt Built in flash settings External flash func setting Built in flash settings 5 Select EasyWireless Built in flash EasyWireless l e Under Built in flash select EasyWireless then press lt amp gt Built in flash settings 6 Set Channel Built in flash EasyWireless Set the transmission channel 1 4 to the same one as the slave unit Channel 7 Take the picture Set the camera and take picture in the same way as with normal shooting Built in flash settings Exit the wireless flash shooting Built in flash NormalFiring e For Built in flash select Shutter sync Ist curtain NormalFiring exp comp fee A Pa F Setting E TTL II meter to Evaluative is recommended e Even though the firing of the built in flash is dis
2. Y Turn the lt gt dial to set the desired y ENIS shutter speed then focus the subject aS gt The aperture will be set automatically zr If the aperture display blinks turn the LAA lt gt dial until it stops blinking Av Aperture priority AE e Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt an Y Turn the lt s7 gt dial to set the desired Q De SSS aperture then focus the subject Do gt The shutter speed will be set S an automatically Av 1 125 F5 6x 400 e f the shutter speed display blinks turn the lt s gt dial until it stops blinking H fi 3 6 Quick Reference Guide AF AF Operation e Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt e Press the lt gt AF gt button Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the AF operation then press lt 1 gt AF operation ONE SHOT One Shot AF One Shot AF For still subjects Al FOCUS AI Focus AF Rue S witches the AF Operation automatically Al SERVO AI Servo AF AF Point For moving subjects y 07 e Press the lt E gt button Ory Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the AF point While looking through the viewfinder you can select the AF point by turning the lt s3 gt dial until the desired AF point flashes in red Pressing lt G gt toggles the AF AF point selec
3. 46 uam Menu Operations a Menu Setting Procedure Bonotd s 1 Display the menu screen image quality al e Press the lt MENU gt button to display Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON the menu screen Image review 2 sec gt Select a tab P Lens aberration correction Red eye reduc Disable e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select a Flash control menu tab For example the 483 tab refers to the screen displayed when the 6 Shooting tab s third dot s from the left is selected ee 3 Select the desired item Dust Delete Data Press the lt AV gt key to select the ISO Auto Max 6400 Long exp noise reduction OFF Item then press lt gt High 80 speed NR ul A Select the setting z SS e Press the lt AF gt or lt lt P gt key to ISO Aut id i 3 EA select the desired setting Some Max 1600 settings require you to press either ee the lt AV gt or lt lt P gt key to select it eae e The current setting is indicated in blue nd acde lt ce es 5 Set the desired setting Dust Delete Data e Press lt G1 gt to set it ISO Auto Max 800 Long exp noise reduction OFF 6 Exit the setting Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the shooting settings display ooo amp i High 150 speed NR ul Fl In step 2 you can also turn the lt gt dial to select a menu tab e In steps 2 to 5 you can also use the LCD monitor s to
4. Playback position E e To search images according to the shooting date select Date e To search images according to folder select Folder e Ifthe card contains both movies and still photos select Movies or Stills to display only either ones Ifnoimages match the selected Rating you cannot browse through the images with the lt gt dial 243 Q Q Magnified View mE You can magnify a captured image by approx 1 5x to 10x on the LCD monitor 1 Magnify the image Press the lt gt button during image playback gt The image will be magnified If you hold down the lt amp gt button the image will be magnified until it reaches the maximum magnification Press the lt E Q gt button to reduce the magnification If you hold down i ai the button the magnification will be H reduced to the single image display L Magnified area position 2 Scroll around the image e Use the lt lt gt gt key to scroll around the magnified image To exit the magnified display press the lt gt gt button and the single image display will return E In magnified view you can turn the lt gt dial to view another image at the same magnification e The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately after shooting e A movie cannot be magnified 244 A Playing Back with the Touch Screen mam The LCD monitor is a touch sensitive panel that
5. Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps You can press the shutter button halfway Then you can further press the shutter button completely Pressing halfway This activates autofocusing and the a automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture The exposure setting shutter soeed and aperture is displayed in the viewfinder O4 Pressing completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture Preventing Camera Shake Hand held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake It can cause blurred pictures To prevent camera shake note the following e Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page e Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus then slowly press the shutter button completely E e f you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture e Even during menu display image playback or image recording you can instantly go back to shooting ready by pressing the shutter button halfway 43 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions mm You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor This is called the Quick Control screen E 1 Press the lt Q gt button F gt The Quick Control screen will appear 6
6. 59 ay Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto 60 The flash was raised even though it was daylight For a backlit subject the flash may pop up to help lighten the subject s dark areas If you do not want the flash to fire set it to Flash Off p 63 Except for the flash setting the settings will be the same as in lt J gt The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright Move farther from the subject and shoot When shooting flash photography if the subject is too close to the camera the picture may come out extremely bright overexposure In low light the built in flash fired a series of flashes Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built in flash to fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing This is called AF assist beam Its effective range is approx 4 meters 13 1 feet When flash was used the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark You were too close to the subject and the lens barrel created a shadow Move further away from the subject If a hood is attached to the lens remove it before taking the flash picture 45 Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective In the lt 4J gt mode while you press the shutter button halfway to focus a still subject the focus will be locked You can then reco
7. By E or All image e When using a PictBridge printer print no more than 400 images for one print order If you specify more than this all the images may not be printed 291 gt Direct Printing with DPOF memme Print order With a PictBridge printer you can easily Lj Standard i At A idi print images with DPOF Date File No Sel Image Byka All image Set up Print MENU pe 1 Prepare to print See page 280 Follow the Connecting the Camera to a Printer procedure up to step 5 2 Under the 1 tab select Print order 3 Select Print Print will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible A Set the Paper settings p 282 Set the printing effects p 284 if necessary 5 Select OK ap e Before printing be sure to set the paper size e Certain printers cannot imprint the file number e f Bordered is set certain printers may imprint the date on the border e Depending on the printer the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright background or on the border F e Under Adjust levels Manual cannot be selected e f you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images select Resume Note that printing will not resume if you stop the printing and any of the following occurs e Before resuming the printing you changed the print order or deleted print ordered images e When you set the index
8. EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras are contained on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk EOS Utility With the camera connected to a personal computer EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot remotely with the computer connected to the camera Also you can copy background music tracks such as EOS Sample Music to the card Can be used as background music during playback of video snapshot albums movies or slide shows on the camera Digital Photo Professional This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot images You can view edit process and print images at high speed You can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original images Picture Style Editor You can edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style files This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images 364 About the Software SS IY ImageBrowser EX Connect to the Internet to download and install the software This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG images You can easily view and play back still photos MOV movies and video snapshot albums and also print JPEG images EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX QD Note that the software ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser
9. El Creative filters cannot be used if any of the following is set NM JPEG or image quality AEB white balance bracketing or multi shot noise reduction When you shoot with a Creative filter the histogram will not be displayed 153 Using Creative Filters EE SE Creative Filter Characteristics e amp Grainy B W Makes the image grainy and black and white By adjusting the contrast you can change the black and white effect e Soft focus Gives the image a soft look By adjusting the blur you can change the degree of softness lt Fish eye effect Gives the effect of a fish eye lens The image will have a barrel type distortion Depending on the level of this filter effect the amount trimmed along the image periphery will change Also since this filter effect magnifies the image center the apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels Set the filter effect while checking the resulting image The AF method will either be FlexiZone Single fixed at center or Quick mode e Art bold effect Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look three dimensional You can adjust the contrast and saturation Note that the sky white walls and similar subjects may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise Water painting effect Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors You can adj
10. Save as a new album then select OK 189 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots SSS ees 10 Quit the video snapshot shooting Movie rec size 1920x1080 17 Set Video snapshot to Disable saath To return to normal movie shooting be sure to set Disable e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu and return to the normal movie shooting screen See oso a a ee On screen ischial tele in Steps 8 and 9 Description J ee as album The movie E eae will be saved as the video Step 8 snapshot alobum s first video snapshot g Add to album The video snapshot just recorded will be added Step 9 to the album recorded immediately before A new video snapshot album is created and the 2 Save as a new album movie clip is saved as the first video snapshot Step 9 The new album will be a different file from the previously recorded album The video snapshot just recorded will be played For playback operations see the table on the next page Playback video snapshot Steps 8 and 9 K Do not save to album Step 8 K Delete without saving to album Step 9 If you want to delete the video snapshot you just recorded and not save it to the album select OK 190 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots Playback video snapshot Operations Function Playback Description gt Pla By pressing lt G gt you can play or pause the just recorded y video snapshot M4 First frame Displays th
11. You can use the provided software to download the images in the camera to your personal computer There are two ways to do this Download by Connecting the Camera to the Personal Computer 1 Install the software p 366 Use the provided interface cable to connect the camera to your personal computer e Use the interface cable provided with the camera Connect the cable to the camera s lt DIGITAL gt terminal with the cable plug s lt gt icon facing the front of the camera Connect the cord s plug to the personal computer s USB terminal 3 Use EOS Utility to download the images movies For details refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 367 362 Downloading Images to a Personal Computer Downloading Images with a Card Reader If you have a commercially available card reader you can use it to download images to your personal computer 1 Install the software p 366 Insert the card into the card reader Use Canon software to download the images movies gt Use Digital Photo Professional gt Use ImageBrowser EX e For details refer to the Software Instruction Manuals p 367 Fil When downloading images from the camera to your personal computer if you do not use Canon software and instead use a card reader copy the DCIM folder on the card to your personal computer 363 About the Software sxe
12. 6 7 megapixels 5 3 megapixels 2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456 1728x1728 4 5 megapixels 4 0 megapixels 3 8 megapixels 3 0 megapixels 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 720x480 640x480 720x400 480x480 850 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels 2 8 11 Printing Images e Printing p 280 You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images on the card The camera is compatible with A PictBridge which is the standard for direct printing e Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 289 DPOF Digital Print Order Format enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection quantity to print etc You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher e Specifying Images for a Photobook p 293 You can specify images in the card for printing in a photobook Preparing to Print me The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor Connecting the Camera to a Printer ik Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt Set up the printer e For details see the printer s instruction manual Connect the camera to the printer e Use the interface cable provided with the camera Connect the cable
13. Case LP1116 sold separately e All the data above is based on Canon s testing standards and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards and guidelines e Dimensions maximum diameter length and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines except weight for camera body only e Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice lf a problem occurs with a non Canon lens attached to the camera consult the respective lens maker 345 Handling Precautions EF S18 55mm 3 5 5 6 IS STM EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM The kit lenses use a stepping motor that drives the focus lens The motor controls the focus lens even during zooming 1 When the camera is OFF The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the camera is OFF due to the auto power off function Therefore users must be aware of the following points e Manual focusing is not possible e During zooming inaccurate focusing may occur 2 When the lens is in sleep mode If not operated for a certain period of time this lens will enter sleep mode in order to save power apart from the camera s auto power off To exit sleep mode press the shutter button halfway In sleep mode the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON Therefore users must be aware of the following points e Manual focusing is not possible e During zooming inaccurate focusing may occur 3 During initial reset When the
14. exposure index With manual exposure ISO 100 ISO 6400 set automatically manually expandable to H equivalent to ISO 12800 Video snapshots Settable to 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Sound recording Built in stereo microphone External stereo microphone terminal provided Sound recording level adjustable wind filter provided attenuator provided Grid display Two types e LCD Monitor Type TFT color liquid crystal monitor Monitor size and dots Wide 7 7 cm 3 0 in 3 2 with approx 1 04 million dots Angle adjustment Possible Brightness adjustment Manual 7 levels Interface languages 25 Touch screen technology Capacitive sensing Feature guide Displayable e Playback Image display formats Single image display Single image Info display Basic info shooting info histogram 4 image index 9 image index Zoom magnification Approx 1 5x 10x Highlight alert Overexposed highlights blink Image browsing methods Single image jump by 10 or 100 images by shooting date by folder by movies by stills by rating Image rotate Possible Ratings Provided Movie playback Enabled LCD monitor video audio OUT HDMI OUT Built in speaker Image protect Possible Slide show All images by date by folder by movies by stills by rating Five transition effects selectable Background music Selectable for slide shows and movie playback Post Processing of Images Creative filters Grainy B W Soft focus Fish eye effect
15. gt icon 2 0 INFO Shooting Information Display Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode 100 0010 Shooting mode 0400 AMBIENCE Vivid am Ambience effect Daylight Lighting or scene 02 28 2013 13 30 00 With images taken in a Basic Zone mode the information displayed will differ depending on the shooting mode Photos taken in the lt CA gt mode will show Background blur Sample Movie Shooting time f 102 0027 Playback SIseT kx eh Shutter speed re Aperture Shooting mode M C Y12325 80 AWE WEA7 G1 E sA3 0 0 Movie recording mala 68 6MB RG Movie file size size 19 21 02 28 2013 13 30 00 Frame rate If manual exposure was used the shutter speed aperture and ISO speed when set manually will be displayed The lt a gt icon will be displayed for video snapshots 2 1 INFO Shooting Information Display SSS e About the Highlight Alert When the shooting information is displayed any overexposed areas of the image will blink To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again About the Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation The display can be switched with L gt 2 Histogram disp Brightness Display Sample Histograms This histogram is a graph showing the distribut
16. video snapshots white balance Picture Style and Auto Lighting Optimizer In Basic Zone modes only the functions in bold can be set 1 Press the lt Q gt button 610 gt The settable functions will be displayed 2 Select a function and set it Press the lt AV gt key to select a function The function and Feature guide p 52 will appear Press the lt lt P gt key or turn the lt gt dial to change the setting e To set the drive mode s lt Wc gt setting or Picture Style parameters press the lt INFO gt button 3 Exit the setting e Press lt gt to finalize the setting and return to movie shooting e You can also select lt gt to return to movie shooting 184 Mam Setting the Movie recording Size mum The menu option Om 2 Movie rec size enables you to select the movie s image 1920x1080 30fps 10 00 size bse Gaia and frame rate Te mon melh maole Neo Ta frames recorded per second The e frame rate switches automatically depending on the 2 Video system setting Movie rec size e Image size h20 1920x1080 Full High Definition Full HD recording quality The aspect ratio will be 16 9 h20 1280x720 High Definition HD recording quality The aspect ratio will be 16 9 640 640x480 Standard definition recording quality The aspect ratio will be 4 3 e Frame rate fps frames per second 30 le o For areas where the TV format is NTSC Nort
17. 196 Attenuator cccccccsseeeeeeeeees 199 AUtOeEXpOSUTFE ssns 174 Edite a eR et rere 256 Editing out first and last scenes 5 hiseetueddcccccssssemiee Enjoying eteecctceee iia eater tt eee PIG SZE meie a ne Frame rate ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeees Grid display sesseatiawiesiccaranerasceny Information display Manual exposure 0008 Manual focusing Metering timer Movie recording size Movie Servo AF sssseeeeees PUAVOACK eeoa iinta neen Quick Control scarssccniteasanicaetancns Recording time Sound recording Still photo shooting Video snapshot 2 Video snapshot album View on TV Wind filter sscccrccuntuutnadateveeesecencuy Index Multi Shot Noise Reduction 126 My MGM enre ia eaaa kaniinia 303 A Neutrali rii eon aaan E naaa 96 Night be OFFA vatecict tect nennen 72 Night scene aseeseen 72 73 Noise reduction High ISO speed eee 126 Long exposures n se 127 Nomenclature nencen 20 Non Canon flash units 310 Normal Image recording quality 22 NTSG airam nane n 185 320 O een Warn nna ONE SHOT One Shot AF 98 One Shot AF cecer 98 is P Program AE eoio eed 86 PA E EEE E EET 185 320 Paper settings printing 282 Partial metering 117 Peripheral illumination COME CUO ioa A 129 Personal white balance 138 Photobook Set up sses 293 PictB
18. 2 stops in 1 3 stop increments with three shots as shown below You can then choose the best exposure This is called AEB Auto Exposure Bracketing Standard exposure Darker exposure Brighter exposure Decreased exposure Increased exposure sSBidauducteds 1 Select Expo comp AEB Expo comp AEB 2 1 9 1 2 e Under the 92 tab select betes eu Tae a Expo comp AEB then press lt gt Exposure comp AEB setting 2 Set the AEB range Darker Brighter Turn the lt s gt dial to set the AEB aarti viii ek range Press the lt lt P gt key to set the exposure compensation amount If AEB is combined with exposure compensation AEB will be applied centering on the exposure compensation amount Press lt gt to set it When you press the lt MENU gt button AWG E to exit the menu the AEB range will be displayed on the LCD monitor 3 Take the picture e Focus and press the shutter button completely The three bracketed shots will be taken in this sequence standard exposure decreased exposure and increased exposure 121 gt AEB range P 1 125 F5 6 400 CR 012 2053 TEM Auto Exposure Bracketing Canceling AEB Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB level display e The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power switch is set to lt OFF gt flash recycling is completed etc X Shooting Tips e Using AEB with continuous shooting I
19. 8 8 of Live View screen Spot metering approx 2 8 of Live View screen Center weighted average metering Metering brightness range EV 0 20 at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Creative filters Grainy B W Soft focus Fish eye effect Art bold effect Water painting effect Toy camera effect Miniature effect Grid display Two types e Movie Shooting Recording format MOV Movie MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Variable average bit rate Audio Linear PCM Recording size and frame rate 1920x1080 Full HD 30p 25p 24p 1280x720 HD 60p 50p 640x480 SD 30p 25p 30p 29 97 fps 25p 25 00 fps 24p 23 98 fps 60p 59 94 fps 50p 50 00 fps File size 1920x1080 30p 25p 24p Approx 330 MB min 1280x720 60p 50p Approx 330 MB min 640x480 30p 25p Approx 82 5 MB min Focusing Hybrid CMOS AF System Face Tracking FlexiZone Multi FlexiZone Single Manual focusing approx 5x 10x magnification possible Focusing brightness range EV 1 18 at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Metering modes Center weighted average and evaluative metering with the image sensor Automatically set by the focusing mode Servo AF Provided Metering brightness range EV 0 20 at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Exposure control Program AE for movies and manual exposure Exposure compensation 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments Still photos 5 stops 341 Specifications ISO speed With autoexposure shooting ISO 100 ISO 6400 set Recommended automatically
20. Art bold effect Water painting effect Toy camera effect Miniature effect Resize Possible 342 Specifications e Direct Printing Compatible printers PictBridge compatible printers Printable images JPEG and RAW images Print ordering DPOF Version 1 1 compatible e Custom Functions Custom Functions 8 My Menu registration Possible Copyright information Entry and inclusion possible e Interface Audio video OUT Digital terminal Analog video compatible with NTSC PAL stereo audio output Personal computer communication and direct printing Hi Speed USB equivalent GPS Receiver GP E2 connection HDMI mini OUT terminal Type C auto switching of resolution CEC compatible External microphone IN terminal 3 5 mm diameter stereo mini jack Remote control terminal For Remote Switch RS 60E3 Wireless remote control Remote Controller RC 6 Eye Fi card Compatible e Power Battery Battery Pack LP E8 Quantity 1 AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK E8 With Battery Grip BG E8 attached size AA LR6 batteries can be used Possible shots With viewfinder shooting Based on CIPA Approx 440 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 400 shots at 0 C 32 F testing standards With Live View shooting Approx 180 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 150 shots at 0 C 32 F Movie shooting time Approx 1 hr 40 min at 23 C 73 F Approx 1 hr 20 min at 0 C 382 F with a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 e Dimensio
21. Aspect ratio i Metering timer e Live View shooting You can set Live View shooting to Enable or Disable e AF method You can select X Tracking p 159 FlexiZone Multi p 161 FlexiZone Single p 162 or Quick mode p 166 e Continuous AF The default setting is Enable Since the focus is constantly close to the subject when you press the shutter button the camera quickly focuses the subject If Enable is set the lens will operate frequently and consume more battery power This will reduce the number of possible shots battery life Also if the AF method is set to Quick mode Continuous AF will be automatically set to Disable If you select another AF method Continuous AF will revert to the original setting During Continuous AF turn off the power before you set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt e Touch Shutter Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen you can focus and take the picture automatically For details see page 168 e Grid display With Grid 1 or Grid 2 you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally 156 Cs Menu Function Settings Doo S e Aspect ratio The image s aspect ratio can be set to 3 2 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when the following aspect ratios are set 4 3 16 9 1 1 JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio images will always be saved with
22. CustWireless e Follow step 2 on page 234 to select pia ene i 2 a then press lt gt Wireless func i Built in flash settings 2 Set Firing group to A B Wireless func m Channel 1 Firing group a GH Set the desired flash ratio and take the picture Channel Select A B fire ratio and set the Fring group ed flash ratio A 6 fire ratio Fa Ho 2 Built in flash settings Wireless func wD If Firing group is set to 4 A B group C will not fire Fl The 8 1 to 1 1 to 1 8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3 1 to 1 1 to 1 3 stops 1 2 stop increments 236 Custom Wireless Flash Shooting Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites The built in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained on pages 235 236 The basic settings are shown below By changing the Firing group setting you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple Speedlites complemented with the built in flash Built in flash settings Basic settings Built in flash CustWireless Ua Flash mode E TTL Il Eater OPK PN E TTL II meter Evaluative Wireless func Wireless func 7 41 oli Channel Same as slave units A exp comp 1 1 9 1 72 MENU fa Built in flash settings 2 Select Firing group i Select the firing group then set the Wireless func Hee eee flash ratio flash exposure Aexp comp 2 1 9 1 7 compensation and
23. If On is set the sound recording level will be adjusted automatically same as with Auto However the wind filter function will not take effect e The sound volume balance between L left and R right cannot be adjusted e Both Land R record audio at a 48 kHz 16 bit sampling rate e Video snapshot You can shoot video snapshots For details see page 187 199 z Movie Shooting Cautions White lt M gt and Red lt i gt Internal Temperature Warning Icons e f the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or under a high ambient temperature a white icon lt M gt will appear Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed the movie s image quality will hardly be affected However if you shoot still photos the image quality of the still photos may deteriorate It is recommended to stop still photo shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down e f the camera s internal temperature further increases while the white icon lt M gt is displayed a red icon lt gt will start blinking This blinking icon indicates that movie shooting will soon stop automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt M gt and lt i gt icons to appear earlier When you are not shooting
24. Small Image recording quality Soee tases cal irtadznentee Cb Vewdinn 22 278 Soft fOCUS ae 154 275 SOMW ANG sore este 3 364 Speaker vannes i een 254 Special scene MOde 00008 71 SPOS eare er a 70 Spot metering 0 cee 117 SRGB e O A 141 Stopped down aperture 114 MOU EAD E cea veces tease ons EEE 27 System map Giincctonce acetone 316 Tap t TOUGH rris a 53 Temperature warning 171 200 TIMEZONE iea h 36 Tone priority ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 299 Toning effect Monochrome 134 Touch beeping cceeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 54 Touch screen 21 53 245 255 TOUCH SHUHtEL cccecceeeeeeee scene 168 Toy camera effect 155 276 Tripod socket seeen 21 Tv Shutter priority AE 110 0 USB Digital terminal 280 362 Vari Angle LCD monitor 33 62 Video snapshot ceeeeee 187 Video snapshot aloum 187 Video system 185 265 320 View on TV ou eceeceeeeeeeeeee ees 252 262 VIGWINOOR aiicdeeraiaetddvcdaewtteres 23 Dioptric adjustment 42 Volume Movie playback 255 Water painting effect 154 276 WB White balance 137 White balance cccccseceeeeeees 137 Bracketing siccsewiavenasessateeeaws 140 COME CHON ica nctwsas teh ounusvesewicnd 139 CUSTOM excacevessnassasccccnsvanaraeanne
25. While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder you can set the exposure as desired This method is called manual exposure lt M gt stands for Manual Sc 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt De WS 2 Set the ISO speed p 92 Set the shutter speed and aperture e To set the shutter speed turn the lt gt dial lt Avid gt lt 24 gt e To set the aperture hold down the lt Avii4 gt button and turn the lt s gt dial Standard exposure index A Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The exposure setting will be Exposure level mark displayed in the viewfinder The exposure level mark lt f gt indicates how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level Set the exposure and take the picture Check the exposure level and set the desired shutter speed and aperture e If the exposure compensation amount exceeds 2 stops from the standard exposure the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt 4 gt or lt gt in the viewfinder On the LCD monitor if the exposure level exceeds 3 stops lt 4q gt or lt gt will be displayed M 1 200 F6 3 400 CL LI a ee 112 ane 11 12 ISO AT o o If ISO Auto is set the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed and aperture to obtain a standard exposure Therefore you may not obtain the desired exposure effect 115 M Manual Exposure Fl In 2 A
26. White balance p 137 Auto Daylight By Shade Cloudy 3 Tungsten light gt White fluorescent light Flash x Custom Eye Fi transmission status p 311 Drive mode p 104 106 1 Single shooting Continuous shooting F Self timer 10 sec Remote control 2 Self timer 2 sec Wc Self timer C ontinuous GPS connection indicator p3 2 1 0 21 2223 Aperture Main Dial pointer Auto Lighting Optimizer p 125 ISO speed p 92 F5 6 3200 Highlight tone priority p 299 Gea 1 Flash exposure z compensation p 120 El N m External flash exposure compensation RAW E Built in flash settings p 220 l 514 Image recording quality p 88 AL Large Fine AL Large Normal AM Medium F ine AM Medium Normal 4S1 Small 1 Fine W S1 Small 1 Normal S2 Small 2 Fine S3 Small 3 Fine 4 L R AW Large F ine RAW Number of possible shots Number of possible shots during WB bracketing Self timer countdown Multi Shot Noise Reduction p 126 We White balance correction p 139 White balance bracketing p 140 Metering mode p 117 Evaluative metering Partial metering CJ Spot metering CJ Center weighted average metering The display will show only the settings currently applied 22 Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Spot metering circle AF point activation indicator lt gt Focusing m AF points ea g E E E El E lt ISO gt ISO speed lt M gt White balance 5
27. correction G Shooting 2 Red Exposure compensation 1 3 stop or 1 2 stop increments 5 stops Auto Lighting Disable Low Standard High Optimizer Disable during manual exposure Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance White balance shift 139 bracketing BKT setting White balance bracketing 140 Color space EZA Auto E25 Standard P Portrait 95 Picture Style Landscape Neutral Faithful L M Monochrome 221i User Def 1 3 6 Shooting 3 Red Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots F Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes e The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder shooting Live View shooting and movie shooting Note that the menu tabs and options displayed in gt 1 Playback 1 gt 12 Playback 2 1 Set up 1 to 4 Set up 4 and X My Menu are the same as those displayed in viewfinder shooting Live View shooting p 319 321 The Omm1 and D 2 Menu tabs will appear only for movie shooting 322 M4 Menu Settings D Movie 1 Red Page AF method Tracking i FlexiZone Multi FlexiZone Single Movie Servo AF Enable Disable 19 pi with shutler Dutton ONE SHOT Disable uring Grid display Off Grid 1 F Grid 2 4 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min Metering timer 30 min Dae Movie 2 Red 1920x1080 t 1 T 1280x720 G T Sound recordi
28. e To take a bulb exposure tap the screen twice The first tap on the screen will start the bulb exposure Tapping it again will stop the exposure Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen 169 MF Focus Manually maa You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus 1 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt Abele e Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly Display the magnifying frame e Press the lt Q gt button gt The magnifying frame will appear You can also tap Q on the screen to magnify the image Move the magnifying frame e Press the lt lt gt gt key to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want to focus To return the magnifying frame to the center press lt 6 gt or the lt 1 gt button A Magnify the image e Each time you press the lt amp gt button the magnification within the frame will change as follows i 1x gt 5x gt 10x gt Magnification canceled 7 Magnifying frame 5 Focus manually While looking at the magnified image turn the lens focusing ring to focus e After achieving focus press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view 6 Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then Magnified area position press the shutter button to take the Magnification picture p 146 170 Ww Live View Shooting Cautions Image Quality e W
29. eee e Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time In Basic Zone modes metering timer is fixed at 16 sec Fl e The Live View shooting will stop with any of the following operations To resume Live View shooting press the lt gt button again e When selecting 83 Dust Delete Data 3 Sensor cleaning 4 Clear settings or 4 6 firmware ver e Even if a low ISO speed is set noise may be noticeable in the displayed Live View image under low light However when you shoot the image recorded will have minimal noise The image quality of the Live View image is different from that of the recorded image 158 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method m Selecting the AF Method You can select the AF method suiting the shooting conditions or subject The following AF methods are provided 4 face Tracking FlexiZone Multi 9 161 FlexiZone Single p 162 and Quick mode p 166 AF methods other than the Quick mode use the image sensor to autofocus while displaying the Live View image Select the AF method Under the tab select AF method Select the desired AF method then FlexiZone Sim press lt GE gt ae ee e While the Live View image is displayed you can also press the lt Q gt button to select the AF method a on the Quick Control screen p 151 oe ee ORCE ee e AF method tE 4 Tracking Flexizone Mu X fac
30. eee eee BOM Oe ee et t Image quality iL Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Image review Z SEC Lens aberration correction Red eye reduc Disable Flash control Flash firing Flash control Flash firing Enable E TTL Il meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO Built in flash settings E TTL II meter Flash control E TTL l meter b Evaluative Average e Normally set this to Enable If Disable is set neither the built in flash nor the external Speedlite will fire This is useful when you only want to use the flash s AF assist beam For normal flash exposures set this to Evaluative Average is for advanced users As with an external Speedlite the metering area is averaged Flash exposure compensation may be necessary Fl Even if Flash firing is set to Disable if focus is difficult to achieve in low light the flash may still fire a series of flashes AF assist beam p 101 218 MM Setting the Flash Flash sync speed in Av mode Flash sync speed in Av mode You can set the flash sync speed for Auto mia flash photography in the aperture priority 1 200 1 60sec auto be AE Av mode 1 200 sec fixed e AUTO Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1 200 sec to 30 sec to suit the scene s brightness High speed sync is also possible 204 1 200 1 60 sec auto Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low lig
31. gt gt button etc and then return to movie shooting Movie Servo AF will resume e For cautions when Movie servo AF is set to Enable see page 202 E e When Disable is set e You can focus only when the shutter button is pressed halfway e AF with shutter button during movie recording When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie you can shoot a still photo The default setting is ONE SHOT e When ONE SHOT is set e You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter button halfway while shooting a movie e When shooting a static subject not moving you can perform shooting in precise focus e When Disable is set e You can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the shutter button even though focus is not achieved It is effective when you want give priority to the shutter chance rather than to focus 197 tE Movie Menu Function Settings SSS e Grid display With Grid 1 or Grid 2 you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally e Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time e Movie recording size You can set the movie recording size image size and frame rate For details see pages 185 186 e Sound recording Sound recording Normally the built in microphone will Sound rec Auta record stereo sound If a commercially available microphone equipped with a mini plug 3 5
32. lt AV gt lt lt gt gt Indicates the lt lt gt gt Cross keys lt gt Indicates the Setting button 44 6 610 816 Indicates that the corresponding function remains active for 4 sec 6 sec 10 sec or 16 sec respectively after you let go of the button In this manual the icons and markings indicating the camera s buttons dials and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the LCD monitor MEN Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the lt MENU gt button and changing the setting x When shown on the upper right of a page it indicates that the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes p 24 p Reference page number for more information Warning to prevent shooting problems Q F Supplemental information 0 Tips or advice for better shooting Problem solving advice Basic Assumptions All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch is already set to lt ON gt p 34 e It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults e The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens as an example Chapters mE For first time DSLR users Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera s basic operations and shooting procedures wWI BIOlOlOIN O WM wN me ame d oe wi amp w Introduction Getting Started Basic Sh
33. mam Setting the Time Zone Date and Time mm When you turn on the power for the first time or if the time zone and date time have been reset the Time zone and Date Time setting screens will appear Follow the steps below to set the time zone first You can also set the time zone of your current address Then if you travel to another time zone you can simply set your destination s time zone so that the correct date time is recorded Note that the date time appended to recorded images will be based on this date time setting Be sure to set the correct date time Set the Time Zone London is set by default Time zone e Press the lt MENU gt button e Under the 2 tab select Time New York i zone then press lt gt Press the lt lt gt key to select a time zone 02 28 2013 13 30 05 00 e Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed OK cues e Press the lt AV gt key to select the time zone then press lt 61 gt F e The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 46 47 e The time displayed on the lower right is the time difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time UTC If you do not see your time zone set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC Set the Date and Time Cc 1 Display the menu screen Qe d e Press the lt MENU gt button 1 EE eE aEel sanaci 2 Under the 2 tab select Date Auto power off j Time LCD brightnes r Pii ae e Press the lt lt P gt ke
34. or FlexiZone Single e Movie Servo AF The default setting is Enable You can focus by pressing the shutter button halfway regardless of the setting e When Enable is set e You can shoot a movie while focusing a moving subject continuously Note that the camera may record the lens operation noise To reduce the recording of the lens operation noise use a commercially available external microphone Using EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM or EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens can minimize the focusing noise recorded during movie shooting e During Movie Servo AF turn off the power before you set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt 196 tE Movie Menu Function Settings Le SS eS e If you want to hold the focus at a certain point or avoid recording the lens operation noise before or during movie shooting you can temporally stop Movie Servo AF by performing one of the operations below When you stop Movie Servo AF the AF point will turn gray When you perform the same operation below again Movie Servo AF will resume e Tap the icon on the lower left of the screen e Press the lt gt button e If 6 Shutter AE lock button is set to 2 AF AF lock no AE lock in the f 4 Custom Functions C Fn Movie Servo AF will stop while you hold down the lt gt button When you let go of the lt gt button Movie Servo AF will resume e While Movie Servo AF is stopped if you press the lt MENU gt button lt
35. turn off the camera Recording e Ifthe attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer IS switch to lt ON gt the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary it is recommended to set the IS switch to lt OFF gt e The camera s built in microphone will also pick up camera operation noise Using a commercially available external microphone can prevent or reduce these noises from being recorded e Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera s external microphone IN terminal e Ifthe brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting that part may look momentarily still when you play back the movie In such cases shoot movies with manual exposure 200 W Movie Shooting Cautions Recording e f you use a card with a slow writing speed a five level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory The slower the card the faster the indicator will climb upward If the indicator becomes full movie shooting will stop automatically If the card has a fast writing speed the indicator will either
36. w When the battery level is low the continuous shooting speed will become slightly slower 105 Using the Self timer m NAN 1 Press the lt lt I b gt button Sef 2 Select the self timer IS CS e Press the lt lt P gt key or turn the P coe lt gt dial to select the self timer then press lt gt F 10 sec self timer The remote controller can also be used p 307 2 2 sec self timer p 142 Wc 10 sec self timer plus continuous shots Press the lt AV gt key to set the number of multiple shots 2 to 10 to be taken with the self timer 3 Take the picture Look through the viewfinder focus the subject then press the shutter button completely gt You can check the self timer operation with the self timer lamp beeper and countdown display in seconds on the LCD monitor gt Two seconds before the picture is taken the self timer lamp will light up and the beeper will sound faster Drive mode Self timer Continuous 4D With lt Wc gt the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending on the shooting functions settings such as the image recording quality or flash e f you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button attach the eyepiece cover p 308 If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken it may throw off the exposure Fl e The lt W2 gt enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mo
37. will cause the lt M gt and lt fi gt icons to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera e Ifthe camera s internal temperature is high the image quality of high ISO speed images or long exposures may be degraded even before the white icon lt gt is displayed 171 Live View Shooting Cautions Shooting Result e f you take the picture in magnified view the exposure may not come out as desired Return to the normal view before taking the picture In magnified view the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in orange Even if you take the picture in magnified view the image will be captured in the normal view e If 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 125 is not set to Disable the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation is set e f you use a TS E lens other than the TS E17mm f 4L or TS E24mm f 3 5L Il and shift or tilt the lens or use an Extension Tube the standard exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result Live View Image e Under low or bright light conditions the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image e Ifthe light source within the image changes the screen may flicker If this happens exit Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual light source e f you point the camera to a different direction it may throw off the Live View image s correct bright
38. you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing e When you paused the printing the card s remaining capacity was low e f a problem occurs during printing see page 288 292 ll Specifying Images for a Photobook mam When you select images up to 998 images to be used for a photobook and transfer them from the camera to a computer using EOS Utility provided software the images will be copied to a dedicated folder This function is convenient when you order a photobook from the Internet Specify One Image at a Time acaon e es 1 Select Photobook Set up Protect images e Under the gt 1 tab select Rotate image Erase images Photobook Set up then press Print order lt GE gt Photobook Set up Creative filters Resize lsPhotobook Set up Select Select images No of images 0 Select Select images then press Select images z Ge All images in folder E Clear all in folder gt The Images will be displayed All images on card i j i svn eee e To display the three image display press the lt E Q gt button To return to the single image display press the lt Q gt button 7 3 Select the image to be specified a e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the image to be specified then press lt gt ia e Repeat this step to select another image The number of images which have been specified will be displayed on the screen s upper left e To cancel the s
39. 125 AUTO lt 1 gt The function s setting screen 3 2 1 0 1 2 23 EE will appear meh mh a e Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the osor OO fS lt gt dial to change the setting a Flash exposurecomp There are also functions that are set z by pressing the lt I NFO gt button e Press lt 1 gt to finalize the setting and return to the Quick Control screen Flash exposure comp E 234 Darker Brighter i H Hi 1 d b When using external flash its flash exposure comp overrides camera s 45 um Menu Operations memmmmmm You can set various settings with the menus such as the image recording quality date time etc While looking at the LCD monitor use the lt MENU gt button lt lt gt gt cross keys and lt gt button on the back of the camera to operate the menus lt MENU gt button lt 1 gt button LCD monitor lt lt gt gt Cross keys Menu Screen The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending on the shooting mode Basic Zone modes Movie shooting o in Image quality Been Release Sutter woihout card Creative Zone modes gt Playback Ca Live View Shooting Set up 3 Shooting Tab e fenen BROMCE Image quality gis Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Image review 2 5ec Menu items Lens aberration correction Red eye reduc Disable Flash control
40. 249 The LCD monitor does not display a clear image e Ifthe LCD monitor is dirty use a soft cloth to clean it In low or high temperatures the LCD monitor display may seem slow or may look black It will return to normal at room temperature Eye Fi settings does not appear e Eye Fi settings will appear only when an Eye Fi card is inserted in the camera If the Eye Fi card has a write protect switch set to the LOCK position you will not be able to check the card s connection status or disable Eye Fi card transmission p 311 333 Troubleshooting Guide ee Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black Itis the highlight alert p 272 Overexposed highlight areas with a loss of highlight detail will blink The image cannot be erased e Ifthe image is protected it cannot be erased p 266 The movie cannot be played back e Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided ImageBrowser EX p 365 or other software cannot be played back with the camera However video snapshot albums edited with EOS Video Snapshot Task p 195 can be played back on the camera When the movie is played back camera operation noise can be heard e If you operate the camera s dials or lens during movie shooting the operation noise will also be recorded Using an external microphone commercially available is recommended p 198 The movie has still moments e During autoexposure movie shooting if
41. Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher Post processing of the image with software will therefore be required F e f the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space the first character in the file name will be an underscore _ e The ICC profile is not appended Refer to explanations about the ICC profile in the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual p 367 141 Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake m The camera s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close up macro lens In such cases mirror lockup is effective Mirror lockup is enabled by setting 5 Mirror lockup to 1 Enable in the 4 Custom Functions C Fn p 300 1 Focus the subject then press the shutter button completely gt The mirror will swing up 2 Press the shutter button completely again gt The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down e After taking the picture set 5 Mirror lockup to 0 Disable X Shooting Tips e Using the self timer lt j gt lt 2 gt with mirror lockup When you press the shutter button completely the mirror locks up then the picture is taken 10 sec or 2 sec later e Remote control shooting Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken remote control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent camera shake p 307 With Remote Controller RC 6 sold s
42. Detail set EP Portrait Select a parameter LOSharpness Teee Select a parameter such as Contrast Hy pea Sharpness then press lt gt Color tone Default set OSharpness Set the parameter e Press the lt lt P gt key to adjust the parameter as desired then press lt gt e Press the lt MENU gt button to save the adjusted parameters The Picture Fortrakt Style selection screen will reappear Any parameter settings different from the default will be displayed in blue Picture Style 03 0020 60 Fl e By selecting Default set in step 3 you can revert the respective Picture Style to its default parameter settings e To shoot with the Picture Style you modified follow step 2 on page 95 to select the modified Picture Style and then shoot 132 31 Customizing Image Characteristics Parameter Settings and Effects O Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image To make it less sharp set it toward the end The closer it is to the softer the image will look To make it sharper set it toward the Md end The closer it is to kd the sharper the image will look Contrast Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors To decrease the contrast set it toward the minus end The closer it is to HJ the more muted the image will look To increase the contrast set it toward the plus end The closer it is to EJ the crisper the image will look amp Saturation The image s c
43. Fl e Pressing the lt Q gt button during the index display will switch to the single image display and the Quick Control screen will appear Pressing the lt Q gt button again will return to the index display e For images taken with another camera the functions you can select may be limited 251 gt Enjoying Movies mE You can play back movies in the following three ways Playback ona TV set p 262 265 Use the stereo AV cable AVC DC400ST sold separately or HDMI cable HTC 100 sold separately to connect the camera to a TV set Then you can play back captured movies and still photos on the TV If you have a High Definition TV set and connect your camera with an HDMI cable you can watch Full High Definition Full HD 1920x1080 and High Definition HD 1280x720 movies with higher image quality Ww e Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable e Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a cable you cannot play or save movies and images e Ifthe playback device is not compatible with MOV files the movie cannot be played Playback on the Camera s LCD Monitor p 254 261 You can play back movies on the camera s LCD monitor You can also edit out the movie s first and last scenes and play back the still photos and movies on the card in an automatic slide show GD A movie edited with a
44. ISO 50 Aut Max 6400 Long ap noise e OFF speed NR then press lt gt High 0 speed NR ull High ISO speed NR Set the setting Standard Select the desired setting then press lt gt The setting screen closes and the Reduce image noise Especially menu will reappear effective at high ISO speeds SET l OFF ofl afl ofl N8l Multi Shot Noise Reduction Noise reduction with higher image quality than when High is applied For a single photo four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged automatically into a single JPEG image 3 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied QD With High or Multi Shot Noise Reduction the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease Fl If you play back a EM AL or image with the camera or print an image directly the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal Check the noise reduction effect or print noise reduced images with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 364 126 M amp M Noise Reduction Settings QD About Multi Shot Noise Reduction The following functions cannot be set AEB WB bracketing 93 Long exp noise reduction M L M If any of these has already been set Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set e Flash shooting is not possible The AF assist beam will be emitted according to the 4 Custom Functions C Fn s 4 AF assi
45. Ist curtain S exp comp Fey E ki Eas e E TTL Il flash metering Built in flash settings External flash func setting Built in flash settings and External flash func settings Functions Built in flash settings External Normal Easy Custom flash func Fi Wireless Wireless eatin Iring ee 231 ae 234 9 Flash mode mode a synchronization FEB O B Wireless functions reese tations oo Channel ee Flash group Flash group Flash exposure 120 compensation Zoom o For ee aS Flash exposure ahaa and S SET to the N manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions 220 TEM Setting the Flash C e Shutter synchronization Normally set this to 1st curtain so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts If 2nd curtain is set the flash will fire right before the shutter closes When this is combined with a slow shutter speed you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night With E TTL II auto flash exposure two flashes will be fired once when you press the shutter button completely and once immediately before the exposure ends Also with shutter speeds faster than 1 30 sec 1st curtain synchronization will automatically take effect If an external Speedlite is attached you can also select Hi speed 4 For details refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual e Wireless functions When performing optical transmission wireless flash
46. It will return to normal at room temperature Cards To protect the card and its recorded data note the following e Do not drop bend or wet the card Do not subject it to excessive force physical shock or vibration e Do not touch the card s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic e Do not affix any stickers etc on the card e Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a TV set speakers or magnet Also avoid places prone to having static electricity e Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source Store the card in a case e Do not store the card in hot dusty or humid locations Lens After detaching the lens from the camera put down the lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts Cautions Regarding Prolonged Use If you use continuous shooting Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period the camera may Z become hot Although this is not a malfunction holding m i l i l ST the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin x AIi burns About Smudges Adhering to the Front of the Sensor Besides dust entering the camera from outside in rare cases lubricant from the camera s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center
47. Light This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light automatically in low light conditions during autoexposure shooting For details refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual 175 Shooting Movies Scene Icons During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode an icon representing the scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be adapted to that scene For certain scenes or shooting conditions the icon displayed may not match the actual scene Non Portrait Portrait Nature and mackground 2 Color wae Outdoor Scene Light blue m A 0 M 1 Displayed only when the AF method is set to X Tracking If another AF method is set the Non Portrait icon will be displayed even if a person is detected 2 Displayed when the attached lens has distance information With an Extension Tube or Closeup Lens the icon displayed may not match the actual scene 3 The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed 176 Shooting Movies Manual Exposure Shooting In the lt M gt mode you can freely set the shutter speed aperture and ISO speed for the movie shooting Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users Set the power switch to lt gt gt The reflex mirror will make a sound then the image will appear on the LCD monitor Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt Set the shutter speed and aperture e To set t
48. Live View Shooting p 145 e To view the images captured so far see Image Playback p 84 e To delete an image see Erasing Images p 268 19 Nomenclature The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the Basic Shooting and Image Playback section Built in flash AF assist beam p 107 101 Mode Dial p 24 EF Lens mount index p 39 Microphone p 174 Power switch p 34 lt ISO gt ISO speed setting button p 92 Flash sync contacts Hot shoe p 309 EF S Lens mount index lt s 3 gt Main Dial p 39 lt 4 gt Flash button Shutter button ed lt a DY p 107 p 43 f lt gt Focal plane O mark p 69 Red eye a a Strap mount reduction p 27 Self timer lamp p 108 106 Remote control sensor p 142 307 Grip 900 OY Mirror p 142 226 Terminal cover Contacts p 17 i Lens release button Lens mount p 40 Lens lock pin Depth of field preview button p 114 lt A V OUT DIGITAL gt Audio video OUT Digital terminal p 265 280 362 lt f gt Remote control terminal p 308 Body cap p 39 lt MIC gt External microphone IN terminal p 198 lt HDMI OUT gt HDMI mini OUT terminal p 262 20 Nomenclature Display off sensor p 50 217 Dioptric adjustment knob p 42 lt gt Live View shooting Movie shooting button p 146 174 a Viewfinder eyepiece lt
49. Set the Speedlite s transmission channel to the same channel as set on the camera 3 If you want to set the flash ratio p 236 set the slave unit ID 4 Position the camera and slave unit s within the range shown below 5 Face the slave unit s wireless sensor toward the camera Example of Wireless Flash Set up Indoors Outdoors 7 one 23 0 ft amp P i Approx 5m Approx 7m 16 4 ft 23 0 ft 1 If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function the camera can work with any channel 2 In small rooms the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face the camera The camera s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be received by the slave unit When using an EX series Speedlite with fixed flash head and wireless sensor take pictures to make sure it can fire cd The camera s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash shooting with radio transmission 230 Easy Wireless Flash Shooting mx The basics of easy fully automatic wireless flash shooting are explained below Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all wireless flash shooting Therefore these steps are omitted in the other wireless flash setups explained on the pages hereafter 1 Press the lt gt button to raise the built in flash e For wireless flash shooting be sure to raise the built in flash
50. Touch the screen with two fingers together then spread your fingers apart on the screen e As you spread your fingers the image will be magnified e The image can be magnified up to 10x e You can scroll around the image by swiping your finger e To reduce the image pinch your fingers together on the screen Tapping the icon will return to the single image display F Touch screen operations explained on pages 245 246 are also possible while viewing images on a TV set connected to your camera p 262 265 246 Rotating the Image mu You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation E ee es 1 Select Rotate image Protect images e Under the 11 tab select Rotate poe maga image then press lt gt Erase images Print order Photobook Set up Creative filters Resize 2 Select an image e Press the lt lt P gt key to select the image to be rotated e You can also select an image on the index display p 242 3 Rotate the image e Each time you press lt gt the image will rotate clockwise as follows 90 270 gt 0 e To rotate another image repeat steps 2 and 3 e To exit and return to the menu press the lt MENU gt button E E e f you have set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 p 212 before taking vertical shots you need not rotate the image as described above e f the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback
51. Water painting effect Toy camera effect and Miniature effect These are called Creative filters When you shoot with a Creative filter applied only images applied with a Creative filter will be saved If you also want to save the image without a Creative filter shoot the image without the Creative filter and apply the Creative filter afterward then save it as a separate image p 274 Set any shooting mode except lt i gt or lt g gt 2 Press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control screen will appear 3 Select a e Press the lt AF gt key to select Creative filter on the screen s right side Select the Creative filter effect e Press the lt lt A gt gt key to select a u Creative filter p 154 Bromera e gt The Creative filter s effect will appear mae 2 on the screen 152 Using Creative Filters a 5 Adjust the Creative filter s effect e Press the lt INFO gt button except for the Miniature effect Rony e Press the lt lt P gt key to adjust the Effect Standard Creative filter s effect then press maz a Ga lt G1 gt e For the Miniature effect press lt 6 gt then press the lt AV gt key to move the white frame to where you want it to look sharp Take the picture gt The picture will be applied with the Creative filter 4 Even if you set the drive mode to lt i gt or the self timer to lt Wc gt single shooting will take effect
52. When the size is 640x480 the aspect ratio will be 4 3 e With autoexposure shooting Automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 6400 e With manual exposure shooting See ISO speed during manual exposure shooting on page 178 ISO Speed e Autoexposure shooting Automatically set shutter speed and aperture displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway e Manual exposure shooting Manually set shutter speed and aperture Canceled If highlight tone priority is set the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200 Fl Regardless of the drive mode setting single shooting will take effect for still photo shooting during movie shooting 182 Shooting Movies QD When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie shooting the following phenomena may occur e Focus may become far off momentarily The brightness of the recorded movie may be different from that of the actual scene e The recorded movie may be momentarily still e Lens operation noise may be recorded e You may not take a still photo when focus is not achieved in cases such as the subject is moving 183 Shooting Function Settings mE Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here Q Quick Control If you press the lt Q gt button while the image is displayed on the LCD monitor you can set any of the following AF method drive mode image recording quality still photos movie recording size
53. along subject outlines is another chromatic aberration Both lens aberrations can be corrected images can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 364 Peripheral Illumination Correction sry dg allah gtd 1 Select Lens aberration Image quality dL correction Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Under the 61 tab select Lens Image review 2 sec aberration correction then press Lens aberration correction Z E 5 Lens aberration correction 2 Select the setting EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Check that Correction data Correction date aveltable available is displayed for the attached lens Peripheral iumin _ bEnable Select Peripheral illumin then Disable press lt amp gt Select Enable then press lt gt e If Correction data not available is displayed see About the Lens Correction Data on page 131 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected Ww Depending on shooting conditions noise may appear on the image periphery Fl e The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional provided software The higher the ISO speed the lower the correction amount will be 129 tN Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction a Chromatic Aberration Correction Lens aberration correction 1 Select the setting EP
54. and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor camera shake can cause blurred images Using a tripod is recommended Fil About Remote Live View Shooting With EOS Utility provided software p 364 installed in your computer you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while viewing the computer screen For details refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 367 Cs Shooting with the LCD Monitor mas Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor In the lt 3 gt mode the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left p 149 e By default Continuous AF p 156 will take effect e The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the actual image you capture ie 2 Focus the subject ae When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF method p 159 7 3 Take the picture Press the shutter button completely gt The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor After the image review ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically Press the lt gt button to exit Live View shooting F e The image s field of view is approx 99 when the image recording quality is set to JPEG L e In Creative Zone modes y
55. button 610 a Press the lt AV gt key to select FS ee a Standard setting Ambience Fsm Standard setting based shots will appear on the screen T Shoot by Ambience Selection e Press the lt lt P gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the desired ambience gt The LCD monitor will display how the image will look with the selected ambience A Set the ambience effect e Press the lt AV gt key to select the effect bar so that Effect appears at ease the bottom Effect Standard a Press the lt lt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the desired effect 5 Take the picture e Press the shutter button completely to take the picture e To shoot through the viewfinder first press the lt gt button to exit Live View shooting Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture f you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to lt OFF gt the setting will revert back to 5m Standard setting dy e The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not look exactly the same as the actual photo taken e Using flash may minimize the ambience effect e In bright outdoors the Live View image you see on the screen may not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo Set 2 LCD brightness to 4 and look at the image while the screen is unaffected by stray light Fl If you do not want the Live View image to be
56. camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to the auto power off function the lens performs an initial reset of the focus lens Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus during the initial reset this is not a malfunction e Although the shutter can be released during the initial reset users must wait approx 1 second after the initial reset has completed before shooting Applicable to the following EF S lens compatible digital SLR cameras EOS 7D Mark II EOS 7D EOS 70D EOS 60D EOS 60Da EOS 50D EOS 40D EOS 30D EOS 20D EOS 20Da EOS REBEL T3i 600D EOS REBEL T2i 550D EOS REBEL 1T1i 500D EOS REBEL XSi 450D EOS REBEL T5 1200D EOS REBEL T3 1100D EOS REBEL XS 1000D EOS DIGITAL REBEL XTi 400D DIGITAL EOS DIGITAL REBEL XT 350D DIGITAL EOS DIGITAL REBEL 300D DIGITAL 2 The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used _ 346 Trademarks e Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC e HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC e All other
57. e lf flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite Flash exposure compensation p 221 cannot be set in the External flash func setting screen Also if you set flash exposure compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external Speedlite the Speedlite s flash exposure compensation setting will be given priority When the Speediite s flash exposure compensation is canceled set to 0 Flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera 329 Troubleshooting Guide High speed sync cannot be set in the lt Av gt mode Under t431 Flash control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to Auto p 219 The camera makes a noise when it is shaken e The built in flash s pop up mechanism moves slightly This is normal The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting e If you use flash the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot p 147 During Live View and movie shooting a white lt i gt or red lt i gt icon is displayed It indicates that the camera s internal temperature is high If the white lt M gt icon is displayed the still photo s image quality may deteriorate If the red lt i gt icon is displayed it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon stop automatically p 171 200 Movie shooting stops by itself e Ifthe card s writing speed is slow movie shooting may stop automatically Use a
58. excluding power cord e EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Angle of view Diagonal extent 74 20 27 50 Horizontal extent 64 30 23 20 Vertical extent 45 30 15 40 Lens construction 13 elements in 11 groups Minimum aperture f 22 36 Closest focusing distance 0 25 m 0 82 ft from image sensor plane 344 Specifications a a E Max magnification 0 36x at 55 mm Field of view 199 x 129 63 x 42 mm 7 83 x 5 08 2 48 x 1 65 in at 0 25 m 0 82 ft Image Stabilizer Lens shift type Filter size 58 mm Lens cap E 58 II Max diameter x length Approx 69 0 x 75 2 mm 2 72 x 2 96 in Weight Approx 205 g 7 2 oz Hood EW 63C sold separately Case LP1016 sold separately e EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Angle of view Diagonal extent 74 20 11 30 Horizontal extent 64 30 9 30 Vertical extent 45 30 6 20 Lens construction 16 elements in 12 groups Minimum aperture f 22 36 Closest focusing distance At 18 mm focal length 0 39 m 1 28 ft Approx 372 x 248 mm 14 6 x 9 8 in field of view At 135 mm focal length 0 39 m 1 28 ft Approx 80 x 53 mm 3 1 x 2 1 in field of view Distance from image sensor plane Max magnification 0 28x at 185 mm Image Stabilizer Lens shift type Filter size 67 mm Lens cap E 67 Il Max diameter x length Approx 76 6 x 96 0 mm 3 0 x 3 8 in Weight Approx 480 g 16 9 oz Hood EW 73B sold separately
59. gg TO ut mi 211 1o correction lt gt AE lock lt gt Focus AEB in progress confirmation light Max burst lt gt Flash ready Improper FE lock warning lt B W gt Monochrome shooting ISO speed lt gt High speed sync FP flash eeu o lt 4 gt FE lock FEB in progress lt D gt Highlight tone priority Exposure level indicator Exposure compensation amount lt 4 gt Flash exposure AEB range compensation Red eye reduction lamp on indicator Aperture Shutter speed Card full warning FuLL FE lock FEL Card error warning Card Busy buSY No card warning Card Built in flash recycling buSY The display will show only the settings currently applied 23 Nomenclature OCS Mode Dial The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone modes Creative Zone These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects P Program AE p 86 Tv Shutter priority AE p 110 Av Aperture priority AE p 112 M Manual exposure p 115 Basic Zone All you do is press the shutter button The camera sets everything to suit the subject or scene G Scene Intelligent Auto p 58 Flash Off p 63 i Creative Auto p 64 i Image Zone Portrait p67 ssts S a4 Landscape p 68 Close up p 69 4 Sports p 70 SCN Special Scene Mode p 71 Bj Night Portrait p 72 F3 Handheld Night Scene p 73 amp HDR Backlight Control p 74 24 N
60. i 3 2 Movie recording size 1920x1080 216 Handy Features CA Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically You can prevent the display off sensor from turning off the shooting setting display on the LCD monitor when your eye approaches the viewfinder Under the 2 tab select LCD auto off then press lt gt Select Disable then press lt 6 gt i gM li e x icD auto off Enable Disable WM Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen ioe ees Under the 3 tab select Screen Screen color color then press lt gt Select the Feature guide Enable desired color then press lt gt Touch control Enable sensor cleaning When you exit the menu the selected GPS device settings color will be displayed for the shooting settings screen Screen color Gh P owe fae hi ae eee eee Se Be p amp a 217 13 Setting the Flash memm The built in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the camera s menu You can use the camera s menu to set the external Speedlite function settings only if an EX series Speedlite compatible with this function is attached The setting procedure is the same as when setting a camera menu function Select Flash control Under the 1 tab select Flash control then press lt gt gt The flash control screen will appear
61. information 270 Slide SNOW csseeeeeeeeeeees 258 Transiter anorani 311 View on TV cscs 252 262 Image conversion factor 40 Image dust prevention 223 224 226 Image review ssssssssssseerereereresse 204 Image Stabilizer lens 008 41 Image Zone i icccih cetera oes seaty 24 Image recording quality 88 Index display cere 242 ISO speed ses sitenere eee cunecoe 92 Automatic setting Auto 93 ISO expansion ee 298 Maximum ISO speed with ISO AUTO sesh hee eens ceteataeeee 94 JPEG T a ttl tos ntact tre nea 89 Jump display sirccegreomecedcncteccnnas 243 ANOSCADGS certvatesiahnbtanwouleecton 68 96 Language selection 068 38 Large Image recording quality 22 ERG Baile laliie eemmennemmeerennn etme eeee anne 17 Brightness adjustment 205 Image playback 004 84 241 Menu SCIree N 00cceecee ee 46 318 Screen color aseeseen 217 Shooting settings display 22 50 Vari Angle cai eras eectecteeccucete 33 62 LSS see ela pac signad E Ss ten 25 39 Chromatic aberration COrrection ccasuevscartrcissssecedesaaataas 130 Image stabilizer eee 41 Lock release cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 40 Peripheral illumination COKECHON suit a 129 Light scene based shots 81 Live View shooting 62 145 PSDECL ALO ni oorsee 157 Continuous AF eee 156 Creati
62. instead 212 Handy Features INFO Checking Camera Settings While the shooting settings p 50 are displayed press the lt INF0 gt button to display the camera s major function settings Settings display Freespace 1 90 GB Card remaining capacity Color space sRGB Color space p 141 WB Shift Bkt VACHE Esl WB correction p 139 Enable EEE WB bracketing p 140 gt Enable amp Disable Touch control p 55 o 1 min nrn Red eye reduction p 108 Enable X Enable Auto rotate display p 212 7 APP RMR RI OP auto off p 217 Date Time p 36 Daylight saving time p 37 Beeper p 204 Auto power off p 205 Sensor cleaning p 223 Live View shooting p 145 213 Handy Features eee M Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings The camera s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to their defaults This option is available in Creative Zone modes Per 1 Select Clear settings Certification Logo Display Under the 4 tab select Clear Custom Functions C Fn settings then press lt gt Copyright information Clear settings E firmware ver 1 0 0 Clear settings 2 Select Clear all camera settings Clear all camera settings Select Clear all camera settings Clear all Custom Func C Fn Cancel then press lt G gt Clear all camera settings 3 Select OK e Select OK then press lt g
63. is possible only with JPEG L M S1 82 images JPEG 3 and images cannot be resized joeda Select Resize Protect images Under the 11 tab select Resize Rotat ace RAE then press lt gt Print order gt The images will be displayed Photobook Set up Creative filters Select an image Select the image you want to resize e By pressing the lt Q gt button you can switch to the index display and select an image Select the desired image size e Press lt gt to display the image sizes Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the desired image size then press lt gt A Save the image Select OK to save the resized image Check the destination folder and Save 2s a image file number then select OK Cancel Ok e To resize another image repeat steps 2 to 4 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 2 Cri Resizing a JPEG Image Resize Options According to Original Image Size Original Image Available Resize Settings About Image Sizes The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page such as M x has a 3 2 aspect ratio The image size according to aspect ratios is shown in the table below The asterisked image recording quality figures do not exactly match the aspect ratio The image will be cropped slightly Image Ratio and Pixel Count F Quality 3456x2304 as re 944 2304x2304 8 0 megapixels 7 0 megapixels
64. lt gt On the movie playback panel displayed select gt Play then press lt amp gt 193 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots E SESES See E Background Music e Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private enjoyment Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder e You can play background music when you play back albums normal movies and slide shows on the camera p 255 258 To play background music you must first copy the background music to the card using EOS Utility provided software For information on how to copy the background music refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 367 Editing an Album After shooting you can rearrange delete or play back the video snapshots in the album 1 On the playback panel select X oe Edit gt The editing screen will be displayed Select an editing operation e Use the lt lt gt gt keys to select an editing operation then press lt gt pe S Press the lt lt gt key to select the video snapshot you Move snapshot want to move then press lt gt Press the lt lt P gt key to move the snapshot then press lt gt Press the lt lt P gt key to select the video snapshot you want to delete then press lt gt The T icon will be displayed on the selected video snapshot Pressing lt 6 gt again will cancel the selection and q will disappear Press the lt lt P gt ke
65. lt gt gt key to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area Rotating the frame Pressing the lt INFO gt button will toggle the cropping frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations This enables you to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image fal Image tilt correction By turning the lt gt dial you can adjust the image tilt angle up to 10 degrees in 0 5 degree increments When you adjust the image tilt the lt gt icon on the screen will turn blue 3 Press lt gt to exit the cropping The print settings screen will reappear You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print settings screen 287 Printing ee QD e Depending on the printer the cropped image area may not be printed as you specified e The smaller you make the cropping frame the grainier the picture will look in the print While cropping the image look at the camera s LCD monitor If you look at the image on a TV screen the cropping frame may not be displayed accurately F Handling Printer Errors If you resolve a printer error no ink no paper etc and select Continue to resume printing but it does not resume operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing For details on resuming the printing refer to the printer s instruction manual Error Messages If a problem occurs during printing an error me
66. lt OFF gt 324 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card the access lamp will remain on continue to blink for a few seconds When the image recording is completed the power will turn off automatically Troubleshooting Guide eS a The battery becomes exhausted quickly e Use a fully charged battery pack p 28 e The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over repeated use Purchase a new one e The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Often activating only the AF without taking a picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often e Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period The camera turns off by itself e Auto power off is in effect If you do not want auto power off to take effect set 2 Auto power off to Disable p 205 e Even if 2 Auto power off is set to Disable the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min The camera s power does not turn off Press the lt INFO gt button to turn on the LCD monitor 325 Troubleshooting Guide SST eae ee Shooting Related Problems No images can be shot or recorded Make sure the card is properly inserted p 31 Slide the card s write protect switch to the Write Erase position p 31 If the card is full replace the card
67. may not match the actual scene 3 The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed 4 Displayed when all the following conditions apply The shooting scene is dark it is a night scene and the camera is mounted on a tripod lt Continued on next page gt 149 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor T 5 Displayed with any of the lenses below e EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS II e EF S55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS II e EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM e EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM e Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later 4 5 If the conditions in both 4 and 5 apply the shutter speed will become slow Final Image Simulation The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style white balance etc in the Live View image so you can see how the captured image will look like During shooting the Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting e Picture Style All settings such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone will be reflected White balance White balance correction Ambience based shots Light scene based shots Creative filters Metering mode Exposure Depth of field with depth of field preview button ON Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Highlight tone priority Aspect ratio image area confirmation 150 Shooting Function Settings mE Function settings particular to Li
68. number of possible shots displayed is only approximate e Does the camera display the maximum burst The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder s right side Since it is only a single digit indicator 0 9 any number higher than 9 will be displayed only as 9 Note that this number will also be displayed even when no card is installed in the camera Be careful not to shoot without a card in the camera e When should use M am images require processing with your computer For details see About GA and About AM A L on the next page 90 Paper size A2 59 4x42cm 23 4x16 5in tE Setting the Image Recording Quality SaaS About is the raw image data before it is made into ML or other images Although images require software such as Digital Photo Professional provided p 364 so that they can be displayed on the computer they also offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only with GAD is effective when you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot an important subject About AM AL K am AL records both a and L image with a single shot The two images are saved to the card simultaneously The two images will be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers file extension JPG for JPEG and CR2 for RAW AL images can be viewed or printed even with a computer that does not have the software provided with the camera installed image gt 000
69. or delete unnecessary images to make room p 31 268 If you try to focus in the One Shot AF operation while the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder blinks a picture cannot be taken Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically or focus manually p 43 103 The card cannot be used If a card error message is displayed see page 32 or 337 The image is out of focus Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 39 To prevent camera shake press the shutter button gently p 42 43 If the lens has an Image Stabilizer set the IS switch to lt ON gt In low light the shutter speed may become slow Use a faster shutter speed p 110 set a higher ISO speed p 92 use flash p 107 or use a tripod Troubleshooting Guide cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot Set the AF operation to One Shot AF Focus lock is not possible in the Al Servo AF and Al Focus AF operations p 98 With FlexiZone Multi it takes longer to autofocus e Depending on the shooting conditions it may take longer to focus the subject Use FlexiZone Single instead or focus manually The continuous shooting speed is slow e Depending on the lens type shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness etc the continuous shooting speed may become slower The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower With ISO 12800 or H equivalent to ISO 25600 the maximum burst for
70. or tie the cords e Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet e Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged e Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet with a dry cloth If the surrounding is dusty humid or oily the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short circuit the outlet causing a fire e Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car s cigarette lighter outlet The battery may leak generate excessive heat or explode causing a fire burns or injuries e A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the product is used by children Supervise children while they are using the product Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury e Do not leave a lens or lens attached camera in the sun without the lens cap attached Otherwise the lens may concentrate the sun s rays and cause a fire e Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire e Be careful not to get the camera wet If you drop the product in the water or if water or metal get inside the product promptly remove the battery This is to prevent a fire and an electrical shock e Do not use paint thinner benzene or other organic solvents to clean the product Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard 350 Safety Precautions i Follow the c
71. other necessary Firing group AN and A l settings before shooting E exp comp 2 01 T 237 Other Settings m Flash Exposure Compensation When Flash mode is set to E TTL Il flash exposure compensation can be set The flash exposure compensation settings see below which can be set will differ depending on the Wireless func and Firing group settings Built in flash settings Flash exp comp e The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built in flash and all moo coup aay mR external Speediites apa core 2 1 9 1022 bi exp comp MEN e The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built in flash a Exp comp e The flash exposure compensation is applied to all external Speedlites Wireless fung Channel FE Lock lf Flash mode is set to E TTL II you can press the lt gt button to perform FE lock 238 Other Settings D Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash Shooting When Flash mode is set to Manual flash flash exposure can be set manually The flash output settings a flash output Group A output etc that can be set will differ depending on the Wireless func setting see below Built in flash settings Wireless func Built in flash CustWireless a e Firing group 4 All The manual TS ROS mus fst flash output setting will be applied to Wireless func all the external Speedlites Channel Firing group
72. p 84 e During movie playback you can adjust the sound volume by turning the lt gt dial e During auto playback or pause you can press the lt lt P gt key to view another image e During auto playback auto power off will not work The display time may vary depending on the image e To view the slide show on a TV set see page 262 260 mam Slide Show Auto Playback U SE Selecting the Background Music NSsel Play background music 1 Select Background music Background music On e Set Background music to On lt ANGELS BELOVED then press lt gt 60 SPORTS HEMORIES aia MENU f 2 Select the background music Press the lt AV gt key to select the desired background music then press lt gt You can also select multiple background music tracks 3 Play the background music e To listen to a sample of the background music press the lt INFO gt button e Press the lt AV gt key to play another background music track To stop listening to the background music press the lt INFO gt button again a e Adjust the sound volume by turning the lt s gt dial e To delete a background music track press the lt AF gt key and select the track then press the lt gt button Fl At the time of purchase you cannot select background music with the camera You must first use EOS Utility provided software to copy the background music to the card For details refer to the EOS Utility I
73. same three digit folder number for example 100ABC_D and 100W_XYZ even if the other five characters in each name are different since the camera cannot recognize the folders 207 Handy Features tW File Numbering Methods The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the images are taken then saved in a folder You can change how the file number is assigned The file number will appear on your computer in this format IMG_0001 JPG Under the 1 tab select File numbering then press lt gt The File numbering Continuous available settings are described below Auto reset earn Select the option then press lt gt e Continuous The file numbering continues in sequence even after you replace the card or create a folder Even after you replace the card or create a new folder the file numbering continues in sequence up to 9999 This is convenient when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal computer However if the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder If you want to use continuous file numbering use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder Next sequential fi
74. screen Recording Images gt p 28 gt p 30 gt p 35 gt p 306 gt p 34 gt p 31 gt p 48 gt p 204 gt p 39 gt p 40 gt p 41 gt p 42 gt p 38 gt p 36 gt p 204 gt p 33 gt p 217 gt p 205 gt p 53 e Creating Selecting a folder gt p 206 e File numbering gt p 208 Image Quality e Image recording quality gt p 88 e Picture Style e White balance e Color space gt p 95 gt p 137 gt p 141 e Image enhancement features e Auto Lighting Optimizer gt p 125 e Lens peripheral illumination correction e Chromatic aberration correction e Noise reduction for long exposures e Noise reduction for high ISO speeds e Highlight tone priority AF e AF operation e AF point selection e Manual focusing Drive e Drive mode e Continuous shooting e Self timer e Maximum burst Shooting e Shooting mode e ISO speed e Feature guide e Bulb e Mirror lockup e Metering mode e Remote control Quick Control gt p 129 gt p 130 gt p 127 gt p 126 gt p 299 gt p 97 gt p 100 gt p 103 gt p 22 gt p 104 gt p 106 gt p 90 gt p 24 gt p 92 gt p 52 gt p 116 gt p 142 gt p 117 gt p 307 gt p 44 Exposure Adjustment e Exposure compensation gt p 119 e AEB AE lock Flash e Built in flash e Flash exposure compensation e FE lock e External flash e Flash control e Wireless flash Live Vi
75. the 83 tab select ISO Auto then press lt gt Select the ISO speed ISO Auto Max 400 octet then press lt gt Max 1600 Max 3200 Max 26 400 ooo He FF FF 2 94 31 Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject m By selecting a Picture Style you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject In Basic Zone modes you cannot select the Picture Style Press the lt V 2232 gt button N m jE UA 1 gt Picture Style will appear Ea Picture Style Select a Picture Style Auto e Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the BOE eC Oe lt gt dial to select the desired E Picture Style then press lt gt INFO Detail set L SET als Picture Style Characteristics Auto The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene The colors will look vivid especially for blue skies greenery and sunsets in nature outdoor and sunset scenes E If the desired color tone is not obtained with Auto use another Picture Style Standard The image looks vivid sharp and crisp This is a general purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes Portrait For nice skin tones The image looks softer Suited for close up portraits By changing the Color tone p 133 you can adjust the skin tone 95 31 Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject Landscape For vivid blues and greens and very sharp and crisp images Effectiv
76. the computer restarts When the computer has restarted the installation is complete 366 Software Instruction Manual mem Software Instruction Manuals are contained on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Instructions for copying and viewing the Software Instruction Manual PDFs are as follows 1 Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer 2 Close the install screen When the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk install screen appears close the install screen 3 Open the CD ROM 4 Open the Manual folder 5 Copy the English folder to your computer Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied Windows Macintosh EOS Utility EUx xW_E_xx EUx xM_E_xx Digital Photo Professional DPPx xW_E_xx DPPx xM_E_ xx Picture Style Editor PSEx xW_E_xx PSEx xM_E_xx Instruction manual for ImageBrowser EX ImageBrowser EX User Guide is included in the software 6 Double click the copied PDF file e Adobe Reader most recent version recommended must be installed on your computer e Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet 367 MEMO 368 Quick Reference Guide and Index Menu Operations p 370 Image recording Quality p 371 a Picture Style p 371 Q Quick Control p 372 Nomenclature s sa iana aaa a eeaos p 373 Basic Zone Modes
77. the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 367 Notes for Peripheral Illumination Correction and Chromatic Aberration Correction wD e Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken e When using a non Canon lens setting the corrections to Disable is recommended even if Correction data available is displayed e f you use the magnified view during Live View shooting the peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be reflected in the image shown on the screen Fil e f the effect of the correction is not visible magnify the image and check it Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life size Converter is attached e f the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera the result will be the same as when the correction is set to Disable e Ifthe lens does not have distance information the correction amount will be lower 131 313 Customizing Image Characteristics mm You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast To see the resulting effects take test shots To customize Monochrome see page 134 1 Press the lt V 313 gt button Picture Style Select a Picture Style Portrait Select a Picture Style then press the MOE Os lt INFO gt button E gt The Detail setting screen will appear TEY Detail set
78. the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera s strap mount eyelet from the bottom Then pass it through the strap s buckle as shown in the illustration Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle The eyepiece cover is also attached to the strap p 308 Eyepiece cover Charging the Battery mau 1 Remove the protective cover e Detach the protective cover provided with the battery 2 Attach the battery e As shown in the illustration attach the battery securely to the charger e To detach the battery follow the above procedure in reverse Recharge the battery For LC E8 e As shown by the arrow flip out the battery charger s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet For LC E8E Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp lights up in orange gt When the battery is fully recharged the full charge lamp will light up in green It takes approx 2 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at 23 C 73 F The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery s remaining capacity e For safety reasons recharging in low temperatures 6 C 10 C 43 F 50 F will take longer up t
79. the maximum recording time shown in the table above p 200 186 mm Shooting Video Snapshots mx You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting approx 2 sec 4 sec or 8 sec A collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot aloum and can be saved to the card as a single movie file By changing the scene or angle in each video snapshot you can create dynamic short movies A video snapshot album can also be played together with background music p 193 255 Video Snapshot Album Concept Video Video Video snapshot 1 snapshot 2 CH snapshot x Video snapshot album Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration ee eee 1 Select Video snapshot Movie rec size 1920x1080 e Under the Da 2 tab select Video Sune Foca iasi snapshot then press lt gt Video snapshot Disable Video snapshot 2 Select Enable Video snapshot Enable e Select Enable then press lt gt Disable Snapshot length 4 sec movie Album New 187 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots SSS Video snapshot 3 Select Album settings Video snapshot Enable Select Album settings then press Album settings E Snapshot length 4 sec movie f you want to continue shooting for Album New an existing album go to Adding to an Try Existing Album p 192 Album settings A Select Create a new album Create a new album Select Create
80. there is a drastic change in the exposure level the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes If this happens shoot with lt M gt shooting mode p 177 No image appears on the TV screen e Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable s plug is inserted all the way in p 262 265 Set the video OUT system NTSC PAL to the same video system as the TV set p 265 Troubleshooting Guide ee There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot e Ifthe movie file size reaches 4 GB another movie file will be created automatically p 186 My card reader does not recognize the card e Depending on the card reader and computer OS used SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized If this occurs connect your camera to the computer with the provided interface cable then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility provided software p 364 cannot resize the image e JPEG 3 and images cannot be resized p 277 335 Troubleshooting Guide Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning e f you selected Clean now J the shutter will make a noise but no picture is taken p 223 Automatic sensor cleaning does not work If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt 4 gt icon may not be displayed p 34 Printing Related Problems There are fewer printing effects than listed in this instru
81. to the camera s lt DIGITAL gt terminal with the cable plug s lt gt icon facing the front of the camera To connect to the printer refer to the printer s instruction manual A Turn on the printer Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt gt Some printers may make a beeping sound Preparing to Print eee P4 PictBridge Play back the image es 7 a e Press the lt gt gt button Press SET 2toprint il gt The image will appear and the lt Ay gt Erot 4 icon will appear on the upper left to ae amp Off p d i ENEN indicate that the camera is connected m 4 Boier to a printer ERE Q e Before using the printer make sure it has a PictBridge connection port e Movies cannot be printed e The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct e Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided e f there is a long beeping sound in step 5 it indicates a problem with the printer Resolve the problem displayed in the error message p 288 e Printing is not possible if the lt F gt or lt g gt shooting mode or Multi Shot Noise Reduction has been set gI e You can also print images taken with this camera e f you use a battery pack to power the camera make sure it is fully charged With a fully charged battery printing up to approx 3 hr 30 min is possible e Before disconnecting the cable first turn off th
82. trademarks are the property of their respective owners About MPEG 4 Licensing This product is licensed under AT amp T patents for the MPEG 4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG 4 compliant video and or decoding MPEG 4 compliant video that was encoded only 1 for a personal and non commercial purpose or 2 by a video provider licensed under the AT amp T patents to provide MPEG 4 compliant video No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG 4 standard Notice displayed in English as required 347 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and or accidents such as fire etc caused by the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories e g a leakage and or explosion of a battery pack Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis 348 Safety Precautions mE The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to yourself and others Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow these precautions before using the product If you experience any malfunctions problems or damage to the product contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer from whom you purchased the product VAN War
83. will be erased 138 WB Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source m You can correct the white balance that has been set This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters White Balance Correction 1 Select WB Shift Bkt oOooffhe amp x Expo comp AEB 2 1 1 22 e Under the 2 tab select WB A O e A Shift Bkt then press lt gt Custom White Balance WE Shift Bkt 0 0 0 gt The WB correction WB bracketing Color space sRGB Picture Style Auto Metering mode screen will appear 2 Set the white balance correction Press the lt lt gt gt key to move the m mark to the desired position e Bis for blue A for amber M for magenta and G for green The color in the respective direction will be corrected EE Cear all On the upper right SHIFT indicates Shift the direction and correction amount E e Pressing the lt gt button will cancel all the WB Shift Bkt settings y 0 Press lt gt to exit the setting and ee E return to the menu ir e When the white balance is corrected lt gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor One level of the blue amber
84. zones if 640x480 is set FlexiZone Single AF O Since only one AF point is used to focus you can focus the target subject AF point 162 ail a 1 Display the Live View image e Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor gt The AF point lt gt will appear During movie shooting if Movie servo AF is set to Enable the AF point will be displayed in a larger size Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method ee ME Move the AF point Press the lt lt gt gt key to move the AF point to where you want to focus It cannot be moved to the edges of the picture To return the AF point to the center press lt gt or the lt 1 gt button e You can also tap the LCD monitor screen to move the AF point Focus the subject e Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound gt If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 146 163 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method eee Notes About X Tracking FlexiZone Multi and FlexiZone Single AF Operation Focusing will take longer than with Quick mode Even when focus has been achieved pressing the shutter button halfway
85. 0 gt Operate the power switch remove and install the battery pack again or use a Canon lens p 34 30 If the error still persists write down the error number and contact your nearest Canon Service Center 337 Specifications ma e Type Type Recording media Image sensor size Compatible lenses Lens mount e Image Sensor Type Effective pixels Aspect ratio Dust delete feature e Recording System Recording format Image type Recorded pixels Digital single lens reflex AF AE camera with built in flash SD memory card SDHC memory card SDXC memory card Compatible with UHS I Approx 22 3 x 14 9 mm Canon EF lenses including EF S lenses Excluding EF M lenses 35 mm equivalent focal length is approx 1 6 times the lens focal length Canon EF mount CMOS sensor Approx 18 00 megapixels 3 2 Auto Manual Dust Delete Data appending Design rule for Camera File System DCF 2 0 JPEG RAW 14 bit Canon original RAW JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible L Large Approx 17 90 megapixels 5184 x 3456 M Medium Approx 8 00 megapixels 8456 x 2304 S1 Small 1 Approx 4 50 megapixels 2592 x 1728 S2 Small 2 Approx 2 50 megapixels 1920 x 1280 S3 Small 3 Approx 350 000 pixels 720 x 480 RAW Approx 17 90 megapixels 5184 x 3456 e Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style Basic White balance Noise reduction Automatic image brightness c
86. 1 CR2 AL image m gt 0001 PG File number File extension E e To display images on a computer using the provided software is recommended p 364 e Commercially available software may not be able to display images taken with this camera To see if the images are compatible with other software check with the respective software manufacturer 91 ISO Changing the ISO Speed mau Set the ISO speed image sensor s sensitivity to light to suit the ambient light level In Basic Zone modes the ISO speed is set automatically p 93 1 Press the lt ISO gt button 46 gt ISO speed will appear 2 Set the ISO speed wo 100 200 400 800 Press the lt lt P gt key or turn the 1600 3200 6400 12800 lt gt dial to select the desired ISO speed then press lt gt e You can also set the ISO speed in the viewfinder while turning the lt gt dial e With AUTO selected the ISO speed will be set automatically p 93 ISO Speed Guide Shooting Situation ISO Speed No flash Flash Range 100 400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO speed 400 1600 Overcast skies or evening time the farther the flash range 1600 12800 H Dark indoors or night will extend p 107 High ISO speeds will result in grainier images F Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 2 ISO expansion is set to 1 On H equivalent to ISO 25600 can also be set p 298 QD Under 4 Custo
87. 10 2 Set the desired function e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select a function The selected function and Feature guide p 52 will appear e Turn the lt gt dial to change the setting Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes P AT EFSER i J a a forman O G aL E Exposure comp ABB setting m 3 Take the picture Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed Fl e For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting procedure see page 76 n steps 1 and 2 you can also use the LCD monitor s touch screen p 53 44 QJ Quick Control for Shooting Functions eee Sample Quick Control Screen White balance correction p 139 Shutter speed p 110 Aperture p 112 Highlight tone priority p 299 Shooting mode p 24 Exposure compensation E AEB setting p 119 121 Ar ea Pee aA Miye SO speed p 92 Ha ih Flash exposure Picture Style p 95 compensation p 120 White balance p 137 Built in flash settings ONESHOT E o a maL p 234 S maL 18M5184x3456 514 A Image recording quality p 88 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 125 White balance bracketing p 140 AF operation p 97 Return Drive mode p 104 106 Metering mode p 117 F Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen Function Setting Screen m Select the desired function and press Tv 1
88. 202 Handy Features Disabling the Beeper p 204 Card Reminder p 204 Setting the Image Review Time p 204 Setting the Auto Power off Time p 205 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness p 205 Creating and Selecting a Folder p 206 File Numbering Methods p 208 Setting Copyright Information p 210 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images p 212 Checking Camera Settings p 213 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings p 214 Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically p 217 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color p 217 Setting the Flash p 218 Automatic Sensor Cleaning p 223 Appending Dust Delete Data p 224 Manual Sensor Cleaning p 226 Handy Features m uam Disabling the Beeper You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved during self timer operation and during touch screen operations Under the 491 tab select Beep then press lt gt Select Disable then Beep Enable press lt GE gt een 5 To silence the beeper only during touch screen operations select Touch to Oooo r E t um Card Reminder This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera a eer eer er Under the 491 tab select Release image quality iL shutter without card then press Beep __ Enable lt 1 gt Select Disable then press Release shutter without card ON lt gt Release shutter without card If there is no card inserted in the came
89. 3 3 10 8 1 7 4 3 3 24 3 4 6 3 3 15 1 6 6 3 3 21 7 9 3 3 3 30 5 1 13 1 3 3 43 0 6400 29 7 3 3 97 4 1 18 6 3 3 61 0 12800 1 42 0 3 3 137 8 1 26 3 3 3 86 3 H 25600 1 59 4 3 3 194 9 1 37 1 3 3 121 7 l 10 5 3 3 34 4 1600 14 9 3 3 48 9 3200 21 0 3 3 68 9 107 4 Using the Built in Flash X Shooting Tips e If the subject is far away increase the ISO speed p 92 By increasing the ISO speed you can extend the flash range In bright light decrease the ISO speed If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks decrease the ISO speed e Detach the lens hood and do not get too close to the subject If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash For important shots check the image on the LCD monitor to make sure the flash exposure looks natural not dark at the bottom M Red eye Reduction Using the red eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can reduce red eye Red eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except lt J gt lt ai gt lt gt or lt g gt Under the 1 tab select Red eye reduc then press lt gt Select Enable then press lt gt e For flash photography when you press the shutter button halfway the red eye reduction lamp will light up Then when you press the shutter button compl
90. 6 Handy Features T Selecting a Folder Lowest file number e With the folder selection screen Number of images displayed select a folder and press in folder lt gt Select folder gt The folder where the captured 100CANON 52 ajet images will be saved is selected TOICANON lt lt e Subsequent captured images will be 1O2CANON 1O3CANON a recorded into the selected folder ree 1OSC ANON Create folder Folder name Highest file number F About Folders As with 100CANON for example the folder name starts with three digits folder number followed by five alphanumeric characters A folder can contain up to 9999 images file number 0001 9999 When a folder becomes full a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created automatically Also if manual reset p 209 is executed a new folder will be created automatically Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created Creating Folders with a Personal Computer Open the card on the screen and create a new folder named DCIM Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images The folder name must follow the format 100ABC_D The first three digits are the folder number from 100 to 999 The next five characters can be any combination of upper and lower case letters from A to Z numerals and the underscore _ The space cannot be used Also note that two folder names cannot share the
91. 7 Revert to default settings 214 Rotate image 212 247 287 Se Safety precautions ccceee 349 Saturation nanira nipa 133 Scene CON ccecce 149 176 SD SDHC SDXC card gt Card Second curtain synchronization 221 Self tiMer ccceceeeeeeeceeeeeessseeeees 106 Sensor cleaning e e 223 226 Sepia Monochrome 77 134 Sharpness ce eeceecceceesssssesseeeeeeeees 133 Shooting information display 270 Shooting Mode 24 Av Aperture priority AE 112 M Manual exposure 115 P Program AE ccceeeeeeees 86 Tv Shutter priority AE 110 Scene Intelligent Auto 58 CG Flash Off eeeeeeeeeees 63 Creative Auto cceee 64 Portrait esl eae tetera 67 2A Landscape ccccceeeeees 68 Y ClOSC UP ceccceeeeestteeeees 69 WH SH OUS esas rebesnsnsuleed buss 70 SCN Special scene 71 Ej Night Portrait 0 0 72 Handheld Night Scene 73 a HDR Backlight Control 74 Shooting mode s settable TUNCTIONS c2 cccc cate Actete moll etal aes 314 Shooting settings display 22 50 Shutter button sessen 43 Shutter synchronization 221 Shutter priority AE 110 Single shooting eee 66 315 Single image display 0 84 Single point AF oaeee 100 Slide SNOW ccccceeeceeceeeeesseeess 258
92. 8 Faithful ge i a i eaa mar 96 FE lOCK aiana eaen EEE 124 Feature guide cece 52 EB 3 ccscasshvneessansseddodemponeeenzeceaads 220 File AMG av wcssiaccccusassnssvrardiirehiuiien 208 File SIZG acnee 89 186 270 Filter effect 134 274 Final image simulation 150 181 Fine Image recording quality 22 Firmware Ver cccccccssseeeeeeees 321 First curtain synchronization 221 Fish eye effect 154 276 Flash Built in flash se2socsassdensnccewecee 107 Custom Functions 00 222 Effective range e 107 External Speedlite 309 FE OCK isiin 124 Flash control ceceeeeeee 218 Flash exposure CcompensattiOn 0 e 120 Flash off sccecneceredbeccctesanes 63 66 76 Flash sync speed 310 Manual flash 05 221 239 Red eye reduction 108 Shutter synchronization 1st 2nd curtain 68 221 Wireless cdusieacnregveruntvvcuscuneres 229 Flash exposure compensation 120 Flash OCG cise eect ieee 220 221 Flash sync Contacts 0 sccece 20 Focus confirmation light 58 Focus lock cecicccnctusesesnoreaeannnn 61 Focus mode switch 39 103 170 383 Index Focusing AP MONO secesccnauccccct 159 196 AF operation cece 97 AF point selection 4 100 AF assist beam 101 300 Beeper aces ei aheccet eked ae 204 Difficult to focus subjec
93. 9 Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation the image comes out bright Set 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer to Disable When Standard Low High is set even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation the image may come out bright p 125 When I use the lt Av gt mode with flash the shutter speed becomes slow e If you shoot at night when the background is dark the shutter speed becomes slow automatically slow sync shooting so that both the subject and background are properly exposed To prevent a slow shutter speed under 6 1 Flash control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed p 219 328 Troubleshooting Guide The built in flash is raised by itself e Inthe G 9 Y Bi and g amp modes the built in flash will be raised automatically when flash is necessary The built in flash does not fire e If you shoot continuously with the built in flash at short intervals the flash may stop operating to protect the flash unit The flash always fires at full output e If you use a flash unit other than an EX series Speedlite the flash will always be fired at full output p 310 Under 1 Flash control and External flash C Fn setting if Flash metering mode is set to TTL the flash will always fire at full output p 220 cannot set flash exposure compensation with external flash function setting
94. 9x1 30m Peer settings gt The paper settings screen will E Photo Cancel appear F Borderless Print 282 Printing eee QJ Setting the Paper Size Ser Pacor sis Select the size of the paper loaded in E the printer then press lt amp gt 13x18 i eae gt The paper type screen will appear creditcard Setting the Paper Type Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer then press lt G1 gt stele gt The page layout screen will appear Be Paper type Setting the Page Layout Pap layout Select the page layout then press Bordered i lt Ge gt gt The print settings screen will Bordered Default reappear The print will have white borders along the edges Borderless The print will have no borders If your printer cannot print borderless prints the print will have borders _ The shooting information will be imprinted on the border on Bordered Ei 9x13 cm and larger prints xx up Option to print 2 4 8 9 16 or 20 images on one sheet 20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper 20 up Ea will have the shooting information imprinted Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings 1 From the Exif data the camera name lens name shooting mode shutter speed aperture exposure compensation amount ISO speed white balance etc will be imprinted 2 After ordering the prints with Digit
95. CD monitor 5 gt Select the AF zone Pressing lt gt or the lt gt button will toggle between automatic selection and zone selection In Basic Zone modes automatic selection is set automatically Use the lt lt gt gt keys to select a zone To return to the center zone press lt 1 gt or the lt 1 gt button again e You can also tap the LCD monitor screen to select a zone When a zone is selected tap 15 on the screen to switch to automatic selection 161 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method Focus the subject e Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound If focus is not achieved the area frame will turn orange Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 146 Q When the camera does not focus the desired target subject with automatic AF point selection switch the AF method to zone selection or FlexiZone Single and refocus e Depending on the aspect ratio setting the number of AF points will differ At 3 2 there will be 31 AF points At 1 1 and 4 3 there will be 25 AF points At 16 9 21 AF points Also at 16 9 there will be only three ZONES e For movie shooting there will be 21 AF points or 25 AF points if 640x480 is set and three zones or 9
96. Conversion Factor Since the image sensor size is Image sensor size Approx smaller than the 35mm film 22 3 x 14 9 mm 0 88 x 0 59 in format it will look like the lens 35mm image size focal length is increased by 36 x 24 mm 1 42 x 0 94 in approx 1 6x 40 About the Lens Image Stabilizer mae When you use the IS lens built in Image Stabilizer camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot The procedure explained here is based on the EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens as an example IS stands for Image Stabilizer AR 1 Set the IS switch to lt ON gt e Also set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt STABILIZER ON r OFF 2 Press the shutter button halfway gt N Q U gt The Image Stabilizer will operate 3 Take the picture When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder press the shutter button completely to take the picture 4D e The Image Stabilizer cannot correct subject blur when the subject moves at the time of exposure e For bulb exposures set the IS switch to lt OFF gt If lt ON gt is set Image Stabilizer misoperation may occur e The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat F e The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to either lt AF gt or lt MF gt e When using a tripod you can still shoot with the IS switch set to lt ON gt with no problem However t
97. Depending on the level of this filter effect the area trimmed along the periphery of the image changes Also since this filter effect will magnify the image center the apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels Set the filter effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image e Art bold effect Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look three dimensional You can adjust the contrast and saturation Note that the sky white walls and similar subjects may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise e Water painting effect Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors You can adjust the color density Note that night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise Toy camera effect Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image s four corners By adjusting the color tone you can change the color cast e amp Miniature effect Creates a diorama effect You can change where the image looks sharp In step 4 you can press the lt INFO gt button or tap 3 on the screen to change the white frame s orientation horizontal vertical where you want the image to look sharp 2 6 cri Resizing a JPEG Image You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image Resizing an image
98. E 86 Setting the Image Recording Quality cc eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 88 ISO Changing the ISO Speed cccccesccessccssecesseesseeeseeesseeeseeenes 92 3a Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject Picture Style 95 AF Changing the Autofocus Operation AF Operation 97 Selecting the AF Pointiciscvusnie ava ecdd ia ardvaisntelsaecs 100 Subjects Difficult to FOCUS cccccececeeseseeeenenneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 MF Manual FOCUSING eonna sdenetarcdawacseaes 103 Elie GONTMMOUS SHOOUAG caro aan ec eects cause arraces 104 S Using the Seime cise ese eral vaccine eee ea dae 106 4 Using the Built in Flash ccccccecsscsscsscssessssssseesessesseeseeeeeees 107 Contents 4 Advanced Shooting 109 Tv Conveying the Subjects Movement cccccccsesceeeseeeens 110 Av Changing the Depth of Field cccccccccccsccsecesseeseceeeneeees 112 Depth of Field PreviGw sxvisssitedesencascre vesavsunkenntataveierers 114 M Mana Exposures cova cece dh a RR 115 Changing the Metering Mode ccccsccscecssceseesseeesseenees 117 Setting Exposure Compensation ccccccceceeeseeeeseensnensaneaeeneeeees 119 Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 Locking the Exposure AE LOck c ccccccssccsssecsseeesseesseeeaees 123 Locking the Flash Exposure FE Lock cccccccssccseesseeeees 124 Auto Correction of Brigh
99. E Increasing the Contrast will make the filter effect more pronounced Toning Effect Detail set eM Monochrome By applying a toning effect you can iN None create a monochrome image in that oe color It can make the image look more WUE z Toning effect P Purple Impressive G Green The following can be selected N None S Sepia B Blue P Purple or G Green 134 313 Registering Preferred Image Characteristics m You can select a base Picture Style such as Portrait or Landscape adjust its parameters as desired and register it under User Def 1 User Def 2 or User Def 3 You can create multiple Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as sharpness and contrast are different You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility provided software p 364 1 Press the lt V 213 gt button Picture Style Select User Def User Def 1 Selecta User Def style then press lt INFO gt The Detail setting screen will appear Detail set 2 User Def 1 3 Press lt GED gt Picture Style Auto _ e With Picture Style selected press Sharpness Contrast T lt Ger gt amp Saturation Color tone Detail set ETlUser Def 1 Select the base Picture Style Picture Style Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt s gt SANS Neutral dial to select the base Picture Style Standard Faithful Por
100. EQ gt AE lock FE lock button Index R educe button p 123 124 242 244 287 Eyecup p 308 lt INFO gt Info button p 50 84 148 179 213 lt GH A gt AF point selection Magnify button p 100 244 287 lt MENU gt Menu button p 46 Speaker LCD monitor p 254 Touch screen p 33 46 205 Card slot 53 245 255 cover p 31 lt Avii4 gt Aperture ey hole Exposure compensation button p 115 119 Tripod socket lt Q 2 gt Quick Control button Direct print button p 44 285 Access lamp p 32 Battery compartment cover release lever p 30 Battery compartment cover p 30 lt gt Erase button p 268 lt gt gt Playback button p 84 lt 6 gt Setting button p 46 lt lt gt gt Cross keys p 46 lt A WB gt White balance selection button p 137 lt V 3 3 gt Picture Style selection button p 95 lt lt 42 78 gt Drive mode selection button p 104 106 lt P AF gt AF operation selection button p 97 Card slot p 31 ee _ _ hbhnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnnmnnnnmnmnnmnmnmnmm Nomenclature Shooting Settings in Creative Zone modes p 24 Shutter speed Exposure level indicator Exposure compensation amount p 119 AEB range p 121 Shooting mode Picture Style p 95 P 1 125 AF operation p 97 ONE SHOT One Shot AF Al FOCUS Al Focus AF Al SERVO Al Servo AF MF Manual Focus Quick Control icon p 44 Battery check p 35 mwa a a
101. Functions Oot Image quality iL Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Image review Z SEC Lens aberration correction Red eye reduc Disable e Appears when you press the lt MENU gt button Press the button again to return to the shooting settings screen 50 When you turn on the power the shooting settings will be displayed When your eye is near the viewfinder eyepiece the display off sensor p 21 217 will turn off the LCD monitor to prevent glare When your eye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece the LCD monitor will turn on again By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can switch the LCD monitor screen as follows Display the shooting settings screen p 22 turn off the LCD monitor screen or display the camera settings screen p 213 Captured Image Appears when you press the lt gt gt button Press the button again to return to the shooting settings screen Switching the LCD Monitor Display em F e With 2 LCD auto off you can prevent the LCD monitor from turning off automatically p 217 Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed pressing the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately Q e f you wear sunglasses and look through the viewfinder eyepiece the P LCD monitor may not turn off automatically If this occurs press the lt INFO gt button to turn off the LCD monitor e Nearby fluorescent lighting may cause the LCD monitor to turn off If
102. I Disable Number of images to be played 2 Select the images to be played e Press the lt AV gt key to select the desired option then press lt gt Slide show 46 images All images Set up Start MENU fm Date Select date OVO 2013 rant pete 017 0372013 KS MNAE F m pime ieee SET OF 258 All images Movies Stills Press the lt AF gt key to select one of the following All images Movies Stills Then press lt G1 gt Date Folder Rating e Press the lt AV gt key to select one of the following EF Date taFolder Rating e When lt M 7 gt is highlighted press the lt INFO gt button e Press the lt AV gt key to select the desired option then press lt gt Folder Select folder TOOCANION ranke TOTCANON E TUALAU r 0 SET OF Rating Select images X All Pe i satin gl sug SET El 6 D 3 i 5 Lad ua Slide Show Auto Playback item Playback Description kH All images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played back EF Date Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will be played back Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back Movies Only the movies on the card will be played back Only the still photos on the card will be played back k Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
103. M gt modes you can select the AF point and use it to focus the target subject 1 Press the lt t gt button 66 gt The selected AF point will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder AF point selection 2 Select the AF point Manual selection e Use the lt lt gt gt key to select the AF point While looking at the viewfinder you can select the AF point by turning the lt 73 gt dial until the desired AF point lights up in red When all the AF points light up automatic AF point selection will be set The AF point will be selected automatically to focus the subject e Pressing lt gt toggles the AF point selection between the center AF point and automatic AF point selection 3 Focus the subject e Aim the selected AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway to focus Fl You can also tap the screen to select AF points During manual AF point selection tapping the 5 icon at the bottom left of the screen will switch to automatic AF point selection 100 Selecting the AF Point ee 9 Shooting Tips e When shooting a portrait up close use One Shot AF and focus the eyes If you focus the eyes first you can then recompose and the face will remain sharp If it is difficult to focus select and use the center AF point The center AF point is the most sensitive amon
104. OIOIOIOIOIOIOI O OIOIOIOIOIO OJOIOIOJO OJOIOIOJO Automatic firing O Manual firing Flash off Built in Red eye reduction O Nast Egek Flash exposure compensation O Wireless control Function settings External i flash Custom Function settings Live View shooting OIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIO Aspect ratio Quick Control OIOIOIOIOIOIOJOIOIO Feature guide OlIOIOIOIOIOlIOIOIOIO 6 White balance correction can be set 7 Settable only for Live View shooting 8 If the AF method is lt AFQuick gt during Live View shooting the external Speedlite will emit the AF assist beam when necessary 9 With Auto ISO you can set a fixed ISO speed 10 Works only before the start of movie shooting OIOIOIOI O OIOI O OOJOO OIOIOIOI O OIOI O reine eine OIOIOIOI O OIOI O 1 Os OIOIOIOI O OIOI O OJOJOO 315 System Map ST E2 ST E3 RT 270EX Il 320EX 430EX Il 600EX RT Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite 600E X MR 14EX II MT 24EX Bundled Accessories a Eyecup Ef O Eyepiece Extender EP EX15ll Rubber Frame Ef i E series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses TEREE E TEREE KE E eeeeeee AC Adapter Kit ACK E8 T M Iil Battery Pack Battery Charger LP E8 LC E8 or LC E8E in alh STk BU Thh ie ae Power e EEN Adapter Battery Magazine Batt
105. Q gt button 610 gt The Quick Control screen will appear Fon Standard setting Background blur yea Standard sett Set the desired function Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the function to be set The selected function and Feature guide p 52 will appear Backgnd Blurred lt gt Sharp e For setting procedure and details on each function see pages 65 66 Take the picture Press the shutter button completely to take the picture 64 Creative Auto Shooting Creative Auto Shutter speed 1 125 50 Standard setting 1 Aperture F5 6 ISO speed E100 a Er a a aL 514 Battery check __ Possible shots Image recording quality Pressing the lt Q gt button enables you to set the following 1 Ambience based shots You can choose the ambience you want to convey in your images Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired ambience You can also select it from a list by pressing lt gt For details see page 77 2 Blurring sharpening the background If you move the index mark toward the left the background will look more blurred If you move it toward the right the background will look more in focus If you want to blur the background see Shooting Portraits on page 67 Press the lt lt 4 gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the desired ambience Depending on the lens and shooting conditions the background may not look so blurred This funct
106. S10 some TS 0 S STR Check that Correction data Correction data available available is displayed for the attached lens eae e Select Chromatic aberration then Chromatic aberration Disable press lt 1 gt Select Enable then press lt gt e If Correction data not available is displayed see About the Lens Correction Data on the next page 2 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with the chromatic aberration corrected Q e With Enable the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease e f you play back a image shot with the chromatic aberration corrected the image will be displayed on the camera without the chromatic aberration correction applied Check the chromatic aberration correction with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 364 130 tE Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction About the Lens Correction Data The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx 25 lenses If you select Enable the peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is registered in the camera With EOS Utility provided software you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses For details refer to
107. The selected images will be erased Erase selected images Cancel t Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time When gt 1 Erase images is set to All images in folder or All images on card all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased gI To also erase protected images format the card p 48 269 INFO Shooting Information Display ma Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode Protect images Rating Folder number File number Exposure compensation amount Flash exposure compensation amount Histogram Shutter speed SIPs yammr smi Ealy CORR WIEieee Brightness RGB Metering mode Picture Style Settings Shooting mode ISO speed P E B SE Highlight tone priority White balance WEA2 G1 EA3 0 0 0 RAWET E E sRGB Color space Image recording 13 53 kel 02 28 201 3 13 30 00 Shooting date and time quality Playback White balance correction number Total images File size recorded Eye Fi transfer With G AL images the GM file size is displayed For still photos taken during movie shooting lt H gt will be displayed If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image the lt gt icon will be displayed Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked with the lt B gt icon Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked with the lt
108. WOWeD 144 os a 200L SOS fu IWANVIN NOLLONYLSNI Canon EOS KEBELT 5i EOS 00 pr 18 52 ee Tin Fi J INSTRUCTION The Quick Reference Guide is included at the end of this manual MANUAL Introduction me The EOS REBEL T5i EOS 700D is a digital single lens reflex camera featuring a fine detail CMOS sensor with approx 18 00 effective megapixels DIGIC 5 high precision and high speed 9 point AF approx 5 fps continuous shooting Live View shooting and Full High Definition Full HD movie shooting Before Starting to Shoot Be Sure to Read the Following To avoid botched pictures and accidents first read the Safety Precautions p 349 351 and Handling Precautions p 16 17 Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera While reading this manual take a few test shots and see how they come out You can then better understand the camera Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability After shooting play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused Copyrights Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory card for anything other than private enjoyment Also be aware that ce
109. a With a commercially available Eye Fi card already set up you can automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN The image transfer is a function of the Eye Fi card For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems refer to the Eye Fi card s instruction manual or contact the card s manufacturer Q The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye Fi card functions including wireless transfer In case of an issue with an Eye Fi card please check with the card manufacturer Also note that approval is required to use Eye Fi cards in many countries or regions Without approval use of the card is not permitted If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area please check with the card manufacturer 1 Insert an Eye Fi card p 31 O O a E iSe 2 Select Eye Fi settings Select folder e Under the 1 tab select Eye Fi File numbering Continuous AS stata Ones settings then press lt G gt Format card i This menu is displayed only when an ESD LS Eye Fi card is inserted into the camera Eye Fi settings Enable Eye Fi transmission Eye Fi trans Disable e Press lt 1 gt set Eye Fi trans to Enable Enable then press lt gt e f you set Disable automatic transmission will not occur even with the Eye Fi card inserted transmission status ic
110. a new album then Add to existing album press E x Create a new album 5 Select the Snapshot length The next video snapshot will be Press lt gt and use lt AV gt to select adoed to a new album the snapshot s length then press lt gt Snapshot length 4 sec movie Cancel OK ae 6 Select OK Select OK then press lt gt e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu and return to the movie shooting screen A blue bar will appear to indicate the snapshot length Go to Creating a Video Snapshot Album p 189 Shooting duration 188 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots Creating a Video Snapshot Album Re 7 Shoot the first video snapshot Press the lt gt button and shoot gt The blue bar indicating the shooting duration will gradually decrease After the set shooting duration elapses the shooting stops automatically After the LCD monitor turns off and the access lamp stops blinking the confirmation screen will appear p 190 Save as a video snapshot album Press the lt lt P gt key to select p Save as album then press lt G gt gt The movie clip will be saved as the E video snapshot album s first video snapshot Continue to shoot more video snapshots e Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video snapshot e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select m Add to album then press lt gt To create another video snapshot album select
111. abled when EasyWireless is set it will still fire a small flash to control the slave unit Depending on shooting conditions the flash fired to control the slave unit may appear in the picture e Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit 232 Easy Wireless Flash Shooting eee Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite This is convenient when you need a large flash output Built in flash settings Basic settings Built in flash EasyWireless M Flash mode E TTL Ill E TTL Il meter Evaluative Built in flash EasyWireless Channel Same as slave units Channel All the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure No matter what the slave ID is A B or C all the slave units will fire as one group Flash Exposure Compensation If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright you can set flash exposure compensation to adjust the slave units flash output Select aexp comp then press Built in flash settings lt GE gt f the flash exposure is too dark press the Channel lt P gt key to increase the flash exposure Aie a and make it brighter If the flash exposure is Exp comp 1 9 1 02 le MENU too bright press the lt lt 4 gt key to decrease the flash exposure and make it darker 233 Custom Wireless Flash Sho
112. against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC rules Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Canon U S A Inc One Canon Park Melville NY 11747 U S A Tel No 1 800 OK CANON 1 800 652 2666 CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B When connecting to and using a household power out
113. ages 247 247 Erase images Select and erase images All images in folder 268 All images on card 293 Specify images to be printed DPOF Select images All images in folder Clear all in PAOTOBOOK SERUP folder All images on card Clear all on card 293 Grainy B W Soft focus Fish eye effect Creative filters Art bold effect Water painting effect Toy camera effect Miniature effect Resize Downsize the image s pixel count 277 319 tE Menu Settings gt Playback 2 Blue Page Histogram display Brightness RGB 1 image 10 images 100 images Date Image jump w 25 Folder Movies Stills Rating Playback description Display time Repeat Transition effect Background music Rating SOF FI C J Gad d l Control over HDMI Disable Enable 263 Set up 1 Yellow iy Eye Fi transmission Disable Enable Eye Fi settings ad i 11 Connection information Displayed only when an Eye Fi card is used Set up 2 Yellow Auto power off 30 sec 1 min 2 min 4 min 8 min ai 15 min Disable LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided LCD auto off Enable Disable Daylight saving time Time zone Date Time Date year month day aig hour min sec Daylight saving time Language Select the interface language Video system NTSC PAL 65 The daylight saving time setting is linked to Time zone and Date time 320 M4 Menu Setting
114. ain Use a slow shutter speed of 1 30 sec or slower Use a tripod to prevent hand held camera shake Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink If you press the shutter button halfway and change the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed the aperture display will also change to maintain the same exposure amount of light reaching the image sensor If you exceed the adjustable aperture range the aperture display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained If the exposure will be too dark the maximum aperture smallest number will blink If this happens turn the lt s gt dial to the left to set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed If the exposure will be too bright the minimum aperture highest number will blink If this happens turn the lt gt dial to the right to set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed 4 Using the Built in Flash To obtain a correct flash exposure the flash output will be set automatically autoflash exposure to match the automatically set aperture The shutter speed can be set from 1 200 sec to 30 sec 111 Av Changing the Depth of Field m To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt Aperture priority AE to adjust the depth of field range of acceptable focus lt Av gt stands for Aperture value which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside t
115. al Print Order Format DPOF p 289 it is recommended that you print by following Direct Printing with DPOF p 292 4 If the image s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper s aspect ratio the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print If the image is cropped it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels 283 P Printing eo A Set the printing effects image a Ott optimization a Sea e Set them if necessary If you do not 3 9x13em EPa SAE need to set any printing effects go to Ej Photo Cancel step 5 F Borderless Print e What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer e Select the option then press lt gt Select the desired printing effect then press lt G1 gt e Ifthe lt gt icon is displayed brightly next to lt IMME gt you can also adjust the printing effect p 286 Jra The image will be printed using the printer s standard colors The image s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections No automatic correction will be applied more vivid blues and greens Onaturel itomen cour atime weep automatic color adjustments are applied anaram The printing characteristics are the same as the Natural setting However this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with Natural The printing will differ depending on the printer For details Cy Default refer to the printer s i
116. and battery from the camera and wait until condensation has evaporated before using the camera e f the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store the camera in a cool dry well ventilated location Even while the camera is in storage press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working e Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion such as in a chemical lab e f the camera has not been used for an extended period test all its functions before using it If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly 16 Handling Precautions LCD Monitor e Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99 99 effective pixels there may be a few dead pixels displaying only black or red etc among the remaining 0 01 or less pixels Dead pixels are not a malfunction They do not affect the images recorded e If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period screen burn in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed However this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days e The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures or look black in high temperatures
117. and gradation condition as well as white balance inclination 2 2 Normal brightness 10 Post Processing Images After shooting you can apply Creative filters or resize the images downsize the pixel count WD e The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera e Post processing images as described in this chapter cannot be performed while the camera is connected to a personal computer via the lt DIGITAL gt terminal Applying Creative Filters to the Image mm You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a new image Grainy B W Soft focus Fish eye effect Art bold effect Water painting effect Toy camera effect and Miniature effect rT 1 Select Creative filters Protect images e Under the gt 1 tab select Creative Rotate image f ace Basins filters then press lt gt Print order gt The images will be displayed Photobook Set up Creative filters Resize 2 Select an image Select the image you want to apply a filter to e By pressing the lt E Q gt button you can switch to the index display and select an image 3 Select a filter When you press lt amp gt the types of Creative filters will be displayed a e For details on Creative filter Miniature effect characteristics see pages 275 276 l ala g 4 Press the lt lt gt gt key to select a filter then press lt gt gt The image will be displayed
118. as or 1 Standard white balance 2 Magenta M bias and 3 Green G bias F e During WB bracketing the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx one third the normal number e You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot Since three images are recorded for one shot it takes longer to record the shot to the card e Bkt stands for bracketing 140 mW Setting the Color Reproduction Range m The range of reproducible colors is called the color space With this camera the color space for captured images can be set to SRGB or Adobe RGB For normal shooting sRGB is recommended In Basic Zone modes SRGB is set automatically 1 Select Color space Under the 2 tab select Color space then press lt gt Set the desired color space Select SRGB or Adobe RGB then press lt gt Color space SAGE Adobe RGB About Adobe RGB This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses This setting is not recommended if you do not know about image processing Adobe RGB and Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher The image will look very subdued in a SRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with
119. ase both the RAW and JPEG images Erasing a Single Image 1 Play back the image to be erased Press the lt j7 gt button gt The Erase menu will appear at the bottom of the screen Erase the image e Select Erase then press lt gt The image displayed will be erased Cancel mm Checkmarking lt v gt Images to be Erased in a Batch By appending checkmarks lt v gt to the images to be erased you can erase multiple images at one time anaoooMd ee s Select Erase images Protect images e Under the 11 tab select Erase Rotate image Erase images images then press lt G gt Print order Photobook Set up Creative filters Resize 268 Erasing Images eee iiErase images 2 Select Select and erase images Select and erase images Select Select and erase images PARET then press lt gt gt The images will be displayed e To display the three image display press the lt i Q gt button To return to the single image display press the lt Q gt button a 3 Select the images to be erased e Press the lt lt P gt key to select the image to be erased then press lt gt gt A checkmark lt v gt will be displayed ERO Gy TMs on the upper left of the screen e To select other images to be erased repeat step 3 Erase images A Erase the image e Press the lt j gt button e Select OK then press lt gt gt
120. autions below Otherwise physical injury VAN Cautions or property damage may result e Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source The product may become hot and cause skin burns Doing so may also cause battery leakage or explosion which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the product e Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod Doing so may cause injury Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens e Do not leave the product in a low temperature environment for an extended period of time The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched e Never play the provided CD ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD ROM If you use it in a music CD player you may damage the speakers and other components When using headphones there is also a risk of injury to your ears from excessively loud volume 351 Digital Camera Model DS126431 Systems This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital devices pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
121. ay when power ON p 302 5 ISO speed is settable only for manual exposure shooting F The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View LV shooting or movie shooting Settings are disabled 297 mM Custom Function Settings mx Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function type C Fn Exposure C Fn Il Image C Fn Ill Autofocus Drive C Fn IV Operation Others C Fn l Exposure C Fn 1 Exposure level increments 0 1 3 stop 1 1 2 stop Sets 1 2 stop increments for the shutter speed aperture exposure compensation AEB flash exposure compensation etc This is effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1 3 stop increments E With setting 1 the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor as shown below TOT AA 2a 1a Aa t2 S0 070 1o 2 T vu a wt C Fn 2 ISO expansion 0 Off 1 On When you set the ISO speed you will be able to set H equivalent to ISO 25600 for still photos and H equivalent to ISO 12800 for movies Note that if C Fn 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable H cannot be set mM Custom Function Settings Se C Fn Il Image C Fn 3 Highlight tone priority 0 Disable 1 Enable Improves the highlight detail The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18 gray to bright highlights The gradation between the grays and highlights bec
122. be played back Slide show 3 Set Set up as desired Ea me TP 46 images e Press the lt AV gt key to select Set All i wee bee up then press lt gt Set the Display time Repeat et Up ee oat Transition effect and MENUS Background music for the still photos e The background music selection procedure is explained on page 261 e After selecting the settings press the lt MENU gt button Display time Repeat Slide show Slide show Display time Repeat Enable Disable 259 mam Slide Show Auto Playback SSS eee Transition effect Background music Slide show Fi5el Play background music Thi Background music Off Slide in 1 hon Transition effect Slide in 2 Fade 1 Fade 2 Fade 3 Slide show Start the slide show ENT me T 46 images e Press the lt AV gt key to select Start SARJA then press lt gt anf gt After Loading image is displayed Start the slide show will start MENU fm Quit the slide show To quit the slide show and return to the setting screen press the lt MENU gt button F e To pause the slide show press lt 1 gt During pause H will be displayed on the upper left of the image Press lt gt again to resume the slide show You can also pause the slide show by tapping the screen e During auto playback you can press the lt INFO gt button to change the still photo display format
123. bject other than a human face may be detected as a face Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture too bright or too dark or partially hidden The lt gt may cover only part of the face If you press lt gt or the lt j gt button the AF point lt 1 3 gt will appear at the center and you can use the lt lt gt gt keys to move the AF point Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture the lt i 1 gt will be grayed out If you press the shutter button halfway the subject will be focused in FlexiZone Multi method with automatic selection Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method ee QW When Continuous AF p 156 or Movie servo AF p 196 is set to Enable When Tracking or FlexiZone Multi with automatic selection is set the AF point will be momentarily displayed in the image center if the subject is not detected If you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus in FlexiZone Multi method with automatic selection If you press the shutter button halfway during movie shooting the center AF point will be used to focus FlexiZone Multi AFC Up to 31 AF points automatically selected covering a wide area can be used to focus This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing zone selection E 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the L
124. blink TOT eV 32 SONN a Ss euleaVoalog 0 Dia UU Take the picture Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely 86 P Program AE E X Shooting Tips e Change the ISO speed or use the built in flash To match the subject and ambient lighting level you can change the ISO speed p 92 or use the built in flash p 107 In the lt P gt mode the built in flash will not fire automatically So under low light press the lt gt flash button to raise the built in flash e The program can be shifted Program shift After pressing the shutter button halfway turn the lt gt dial to change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination program Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken Program shift is not possible with flash P e f the 30 shutter speed and the maximum aperture blink it indicates underexposure Increase the ISO speed or use flash e Ifthe 4000 shutter speed and the minimum aperture blink it indicates overexposure Decrease the ISO speed F Differences Between lt P gt and lt Gj gt Scene Intelligent Auto In the lt 43 gt mode many functions such as the AF operation and metering mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots The functions you can change are limited Whereas in the lt P gt mode only the shutter speed and aperture are set automatically You can freely set the AF operation metering mode and
125. camera SettingS 00 214 GIOSC UDS scoi iirinn derien 69 Color space color reproduction range eenen lh ween eaeaes 141 Color temperature 000eee 137 COlGI tonene ee dare 133 COMUMUOUS 27232 cilee eee 208 Continuous shooting 000 104 Contrast cscs asiiveoreitatias 133 Copyright information s s s 210 Creative Auto cccccecececsceeeeeeeeeees 64 Creative filters ee 152 274 Ble Oilriate esearcaeases senses oceataatetertadhe eee 4 Creative Zone modes 24 Cropping printing s s s 287 Custom Functions s s 296 Custom WB ceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 137 a Date Time ssiccdscrsssanriecessaaecateiehandanss 36 Daylight saving timMe ee 37 DC coupler cvoee dt Scccattcoonmacansarereenes 306 Depth of field preview 114 Dall eta ie neee 20 109 Digital terminal 0 280 362 Dioptric adjustment ee 42 Direct ORM zceccsccenaum sannrieeeesccce 292 DPOF a E 289 PAGO ING see ni 54 Drive mode 22 66 104 106 Dust Delete Data 224 Eee Erase image ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 268 Error CodeS eraann a riaan 337 Evaluative metering sssseeeeee 117 Exposure compensation 119 Exposure level increments 298 EXE NISIO late onpettuaiabeaerostactweiweccaaat 209 External Speedlite 0 0 309 FV OCUD erar e EE 308 Eye Fi CatGe sets cca 311 Eyepiece COVET cee 27 30
126. casing breaks open to expose the internal parts do not touch the internal parts There is a possibility of an electrical shock e Do not disassemble or modify the equipment High voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock e Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens Doing so may damage your vision Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants including when in use Straps or cords may accidentally cause choking electrical shock or injury Choking or injury may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory If a child or infant swallows a part or accessory consult a physician immediately e Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places Likewise store the battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short circuit This is to prevent a fire excessive heat electrical shock or burn e Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital check if it is allowed Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane s instruments or the hospital s medical equipment To prevent a fire and electrical shock follow the safeguards below e Always insert the power plug all the way in e Do not handle a power plug with wet hands e When unplugging a power plug grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord e Do not scratch cut or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord Also do not twist
127. ch may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day look warmer Also effective for light colored flowers Tungsten light For subjects lit under tungsten lighting Reduces the reddish orange color cast caused by tungsten lighting Fluorescent light For subjects under fluorescent lighting Suited for all types of fluorescent lighting Sunset Suitable when you want to capture the sunset s impressive colors 83 gt Image Playback uuuuum The easiest way to play back images is explained below For more details on the playback procedure see page 241 Play back the image e Press the lt gt gt button gt The last captured image or last image viewed will appear Select an image To view images starting with the last image press the lt lt gt key To view images starting with the first oldest image press the lt P gt key e Each time you press the lt NFO gt button the display format will change 25 80 et SE 100 0032 ef TS j No information With basic information b 100 0032 125 8 0 B b J 100 0032 P 0 gA blue NNI Mea GI E BO HiL 26 0M8 BOHIL 26 0M8 sRGB 13 53 13 53 02 28 2013 13 30 00 Ea mA Histogram Shooting information display Exit the image playback e Press the lt gt gt button to exit the image playback and return to the shooting settings display 84 Creative Shooting In Bas
128. ck LP E8 e Battery Pack LP E8 is dedicated to Canon products only Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable 29 Installing and Removing the Battery mum Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 into the camera Installing the Battery 1 Open the cover Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover Insert the battery e Insert the end with the battery contacts e Insert the battery until it locks in place Close the cover e Press the cover until it snaps shut Open the cover and remove the battery Press the battery release lever as shown z FA by the arrow and remove the battery 2 P e To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts be sure to attach the protective cover provided p 28 to the battery QD After opening the battery compartment cover be careful not to swing it back further Otherwise the hinge may break 30 Installing and Removing the Card mau The card sold separately can be an SD SDHC or SDXC memory card SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS I can also be used The captured images are recorded onto the card Q Make sure the card s write protect switch is set upward to enable writing erasing Installing the Card Open the cover Slide the cover as shown by the arrows to open it Write protect switch 2 In
129. cleaning GPS device settings Sensor cleaning 2 Select Clean now vu J Auto cleaning Select Clean now then press Clean mowi 2 A gt Clean manually i Select OK on the dialog screen then press lt 6 gt The screen will indicate that the a sensor is being cleaned A small sound may be heard Although there will be a shutter sound during the cleaning a picture is not taken Fil e For best results perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed upright and stable on a table or other flat surface e Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning the result will not improve much Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished the Clean now c option will remain disabled temporarily Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning In step 2 select Auto cleaning t and set it to Disable gt The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt 223 1 Appending Dust Delete Data mau Normally the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images However in case visible dust still remains you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional provided software p 364 to erase the dust spots automatically Preparation e Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper Set the lens focal lengt
130. continuous shooting will greatly decrease p 93 Set 433 High ISO speed NR to Standard Low Disable If it is set to High or Multi Shot Noise Reduction the maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease p 126 e With Chromatic aberration Enable the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease p 130 e During WB bracketing the maximum burst for continuous shooting will decrease p 140 e f you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the number mentioned on page 89 327 Troubleshooting Guide ISO 100 cannot be set Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable ISO 100 cannot be set If 0 Disable is set ISO 100 can be set p 299 This also applies to movie shooting p 178 ISO speed H ISO 25600 cannot be set Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable the H ISO speed 25600 cannot be selected even when 2 ISO expansion is set to 1 On If 0 Disable is set for 3 Highlight tone priority H can be set p 298 The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set If 0 Disable is set the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set p 29
131. correction is equivalent to approx 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter Mired Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature conversion filter 139 WB Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source ae White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot three images having a different color balance can be recorded simultaneously Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting the image will be bracketed with a blue amber bias or magenta green bias This is called white balance bracketing WB BKT White balance bracketing is possible up to 3 levels in single level increments Set the white balance bracketing amount me n step 2 for white balance correction 7 x gt gt A when you turn the lt gt dial the m 6 SCZ gt mark on the screen will change to TKG m m m 3 points Turning the dial to the right sets the B A bracketing and turning it to the left sets the M G bracketing a ear al gt On the right Bracket indicates the SMa bracketing direction and correction 0 amount Pressing the lt gt button will cancel all the WB Shift Bkt settings a Bracket e Press lt gt to exit the setting and return to the menu B A bias 3 levels Bracketing Sequence The images will be bracketed in the following sequence 1 Standard white balance 2 Blue B bias and 3 Amber A bi
132. ction manual What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer This instruction manual lists all the printing effects available p 284 Computer Connection Problems I cannot download images to a computer e Install the provided software EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD ROM on the computer p 366 336 Error Codes Error number _ If there is a problem with the camera an error message will appear Follow the on kad screen instructions Err 01 Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Countermeasures Error Message and Solution Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a Canon lens p 17 20 Card cannot be accessed Reinsert change card or format card with camera gt Remove and insert the card again replace the card or format the card p 31 48 Cannot save images because card is full Replace card Replace the card erase unnecessary images or format the card p 31 268 48 The built in flash could not be raised Turn the camera off and on again gt Operate the power switch p 34 Sensor cleaning is not possible Turn the camera off and on again gt Operate the power switch p 34 10 20 Shooting is not possible due to an error Turn the camera off and 30 40 on again or re install the battery 50 60 70 8
133. d half of 2011 180 Shooting Movies ee ey Final Image Simulation The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the effects of the Picture Style white balance etc on the image During movie shooting the image displayed will automatically reflect the effects of the settings listed below Final image simulation for movie shooting e Picture Style All settings such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone will be reflected White balance White balance correction Exposure Depth of field Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Highlight tone priority 181 Shooting Movies Shooting Still Photos d a S as Taking still photos during movie shooting e If you take a still photo during movie shooting the movie will record a still moment lasting approx 1 sec e The captured still photo will be recorded to the card and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed e The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card e Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting While shooting a movie you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely As set in B 1 Image quality When the movie recording size is 1920x1080 or 1280x720 the aspect ratio will be 16 9
134. der Print order Set up Print type b Standard index Bain Off File No 289 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF Standard Prints one image on one sheet Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet Hom Prints both the standard and index prints Date oF On J ony imprints the recorded date on the print Fie number FF on nl imprints the file number on the print A Exit the setting e Press the lt MENU gt button gt The print order screen will reappear e Next select Sel Image By fig or All image to order the images to be printed 4p e Even if Date and File No are set to On the date or file number may not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model e With Index prints the Date and File No cannot both be set to On at the same time e When printing with DPOF you must use the card whose print order specifications have been set It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to print them Certain DPOF compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the images as you specified Refer to the printer s instruction manual before printing Or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints e Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a different camera and then try to specify a print order The print order may be overwritten Also depending on the i
135. displayed when setting functions press the lt Q gt button after step 1 Then you can set Ambience based shots and Effect on the Quick Control screen 78 Shoot by Ambience Selection eee Ambience Settings Smp Standard setting Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode Note that lt 4 gt has image characteristics geared for portraits and lt 2A gt is geared for landscapes Each ambience is a modification of the respective shooting mode s image characteristics Fy Vivid The subject will look sharp and vivid It makes the photo look more impressive than with Sm Standard setting F s Soft The subject will look softer and more dainty Good for portraits pets flowers etc Pw Warm The subject will look softer with warmer colors Good for portraits pets and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look Intense While the overall brightness is slightly lowered the subject is emphasized for a more intense feeling Makes the human or living subject stand out more Fc Cool The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast A subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive 79 Shoot by Ambience Selection FB Brighter The picture will look brighter D Darker The picture will look darker Mm Monochrome The picture will be monochrome You can select the monochrome color to be black and white sepia or blue When Monochrome is selected lt B W gt wi
136. e Firing group 4 A B You can set the flash output separately for slave groups A and B Wireless func 74 e Firing group All and The flash output can be set separately for the external Speedlite s and built in flash e Firing group 4 A B You can set the flash output separately for slave groups A and B You can also set the flash output for the built in flash 239 7 a p ri iT s Image Playback This chapter explains functions related to viewing photos and movies with more detail than in Chapter 2 Basic Shooting and Image Playback Here you will find explanations of how to play back and erase photos and movies with the camera and view them on a TV set About images shot and saved with another device The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera edited with a computer or had their file names changed gt Searching for Images Quickly ma 2 Display Multiple Images on One Screen Index Display Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine images on one screen 1 Play back the image e When you press the lt gt gt button the last image captured will be displayed 2 Switch to the index display Press the lt 3 Q gt button gt The 4 image index display will appear The currently selected image will be highlight
137. e Tracking AFL Human faces are detected and focused If a face moves the AF point lt gt also moves to track the face oi 1 Display the Live View image ge p Press the lt gt button aMi n The Live View image will appear on A b the LCD monitor 2 Select an AF point E When a face is detected the lt 1 gt AF point will appear over the face to be focused e f multiple faces are detected lt 4 gt gt will be displayed Press the lt q gt gt key to move the lt 4 gt frame over the desired target face e You can also tap the LCD monitor screen to select the face or subject If the subject is not a face lt 2 gt will be displayed 199 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method e f no faces are detected or if you tap the LCD monitor but do not select any face or subject the camera will switch to FlexiZone Multi with automatic selection p 161 Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway to focus gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will 160 sound gt If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 146 If the focus is far off face detection will not be possible If you set Continuous AF to Enable you can prevent the image from becoming greatly out of focus An o
138. e 95 to select User Def then shoot e For the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera refer to the EOS Utility Instructions p 367 136 WB Matching the Light Source mam The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in the picture is called white balance WB Normally the lt MD gt Auto setting will obtain the correct white balance If natural looking colors cannot be obtained with lt MD gt you can select the white balance that matches the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object EN 1 Press the lt A WB gt button We gt White balance will appear a aS Select the white balance e Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the 2a lt gt dial to select the desired white ENE balance then press lt gt F Daylight The Approx K K Kelvin Approx 5200K displayed for the white balance eS a ae settings lt gt lt Bx gt lt h gt lt gt i or lt gt is the respective color temperature SET ls nx Custom White Balance Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used 1 Photograph a white object e The plain white object should fill the spot metering circle Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object e You can set any white ba
139. e LCD Monitor Display ieee eeeeeeeteteteeeeeeeees 50 Feature INOS sse catcceseiaeataeda 52 N Touch Screen Operations sciaianswwatintdaavivwaadiane 53 10 Contents 2 Basic Shooting and Image Playback 57 F Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto 58 G Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto ceeeeee 61 Disabling Flash ssvese avin aerated eg eee aes 63 Creative Auto SHOOtING ccccccccesccsscessecsesesecsseesseecseesseeeeens 64 Shooting Portraits ewe ctsrcaverirnateradaansevienl saneiriientoiaiainadementneinns 67 MA SHOOTING Landscape S nanunanaa aetna ceases 68 Ws Shooting Cose ED See tassios access eeecader se a 69 WB Shooting Moving Subjects cccccsccessecessseeesseeesseeeeseeeeeees 70 SCN Special Scene Mode c cccccccssccssecessccsecessecesseecscesseeeseeenes 71 Ei Shooting Night Portraits With a Tripod ccccccceeeeseeeeeeeees 72 Shooting Night Scenes Handheld c cccccccsccsseccsseesseeseeeeeees 73 a gt Shooting Backlit SCENES wx cahcsershGrreancevcucerccands Siteaererr erator 74 G CK COMI Ol cease as ccc tence Mea te a telat a 76 Shoot by Ambience Selection ccccsesesenceneceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type sicateccaveceecticavdacaisteecewievasiadvedeavons 81 mage Play OAC oonan a aces pth ears cetenaavestens icacaks 84 3 Creative Shooting 85 P 18916 2104 Rr a Scene cre ernene emer re trey
140. e Under the 3 tab select Sensor Feature guide Enable Touch control Enable f Sensor cleaning GPS device settings cleaning then press lt gt Sensor cleaning 2 Select Clean manually Auto cleaning Select Clean manually then press Clean nowi Clean manually lt G gt Clean manually 3 Select OK Select OK then press lt gt dance T gt In a moment the reflex mirror will Clean the sensor lockup and the shutter will open Cancel ok A Clean the sensor End the cleaning e Set the power switch to lt OFF gt QD If you use a battery make sure it is fully charged If the battery grip with size AA LR6 batteries is attached manual sensor cleaning will not be possible Fl For the power source using AC Adapter Kit ACK E8 sold separately is recommended 226 W Manual Sensor Cleaning Ww e While cleaning the sensor never do any of the following If the power is cut off the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and image sensor may get damaged e Setting the power switch to lt OFF gt e Opening the battery compartment cover e Opening the card slot cover e The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate Clean the sensor with care e Use a plain blower without any brush attached A brush can scratch the sensor e Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount If the power is turned off the shutter will close and the shutter cur
141. e When using lt gt see Disabling Flash on page 63 66 Shooting Portraits me The lt gt Portrait mode blurs the background to make the human subject stand out It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer HD Standard setting Default setting n al 514 Vly z Shooting Tips e The further the distance between the subject and background the better The further the distance between the subject and background the more blurred the background will look The subject will also stand out better in front of a plain dark background e Use a telephoto lens If you have a zoom lens use the telephoto end to fill the frame with the subject from the waist up Move in closer if necessary Focus the face Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red For close ups of the face focus the eyes Fil e The default setting is lt i gt Continuous shooting If you hold down the shutter button you can shoot continuously to obtain different poses and facial expressions max approx 5 shots sec e f necessary the built in flash will fire automatically 67 24 Shooting Landscapes mau Use the lt a gt Landscape mode for wide scenery or to have everything in focus from near to far For vivid blues and greens and very sharp and crisp images eA Landscape a ND o oy rs Da mmp Standard setting sT Detault setting o ma am aL 514 X Shooting Tips e With a z
142. e camera and printer Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable e For direct printing using AC Adapter Kit ACK E8 sold separately to power the camera is recommended 281 A Printing m The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer Some settings may not be available For details refer to the printer s instruction manual Printer connected icon 1 Select the image to be printed fi Check that the lt gt icon is Press SET C toprint a displayed on the upper left of the LCD EFO i Re aion 4 monitor Raper i 213cm Press the lt lt 4 gt key to select the E Borderless image to be printed _ ERE Press lt gt The print setting screen will appear Print setting screen yr Est ats E amp off or off D Gb 1 copies Sets the quantity to be printed Cropping Sets the cropping trimming p 287 RJ 39x13cm Paper settings Sets the paper size type and layout E Photo Cancel Returns to the screen in step 1 E Borderless Print Starts the printing Sets the printing effects p 284 Sets the date or file number imprinting to on Zi The paper size type and layout you have set are displayed Depending on the printer certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable BB sort 3 Select Paper settings Off Select Paper settings then press es 4 1 copies lt gt Cropping
143. e first scene of the album s first video snapshot Each time you press lt gt the video snapshot skips back by Each time you press lt gt the previous frame is displayed Il Previous frame If you hold down lt gt it will rewind the movie Each time you press lt gt the movie will play frame by frame If you hold down lt gt it will fast forward the movie Each time you press lt gt the video snapshot skips forward PL Skip forward by a few seconds gt gt I Last frame Displays the last scene of the album s last video snapshot _ Playback position Playback time minutes seconds I Vol You can adjust the built in speaker s p 254 volume by mill Volume turning the lt 5 gt dial Pressing the lt MENU gt button returns to the previous screen With Skip backward Skip forward the skipping duration will correspond to the number of seconds set under Video snapshot approx 2 sec 4 sec or 8 sec 191 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots SESS eee Adding to Existing Album Album settings 1 Select Add to existing album Create a new album e Follow step 4 on page 188 to select pce tp eseng aun Add to existing album then press lt gt 2 Select an existing album Press the lt lt A gt gt key to select an album then press lt gt Check the text select OK then press lt gt Certain video snapshot settings will change to ma
144. e first shot will use flash Tell the person not to move until all four continuous shots are taken QW See the cautions on page 75 73 a Shooting Backlit Scenes ma When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas use the lt g gt HDR Backlight Control mode When you take one picture in this mode three continuous shots are taken at different exposures This results in one image with a wide tonal range that has minimized the blocked up shadows caused by backlighting HDR stands for High Dynamic Range 5 aus z 7 leaned HOR Backlight Control Retain more detail in bright or dark areas of high contrast scenes Takes 3 consec shots HOR Backlight Control Combine 3 shots at 3 expos improve high light shadaw detail mm Pa m au 514 X Shooting Tips Hold the camera firmly While shooting hold the camera firmly and steadily In this mode three shots are aligned and merged into a single image However if there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake they may not align properly in the final image QD e Flash cannot be used In low light the AF assist beam will be emitted p 101 See the cautions on page 75 74 QW Caution for lt i gt Night Portrait and lt gt Handheld Night Scene e During Live View shooting it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as in anight scene In such a case you should set the AF method to Quick mode and sho
145. e for impressive landscapes Neutral This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer For natural colors and subdued images Faithful This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer When the subject is captured under a color temperature of 5200K the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match the subject s color Images will appear dull and subdued Monochrome Creates black and white images QD Black and white images shot in formats other than cannot be reverted to color If you want to later shoot pictures in color make sure the Monochrome setting has been canceled When Monochrome is selected lt B W gt will appear in the viewfinder User Def 1 3 You can register a basic style such as Portrait Landscape a Picture Style file etc and adjust it as desired p 135 Any User Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same default settings as the Auto Picture Style 96 AF Changing the Autofocus Operation mm You can select the AF autofocus operation characteristics suiting the shooting conditions or subject In Basic Zone modes the optimum AF operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode On the lens set the focus mode switch to lt AF gt AFy rMF STABILIZER 2 Press the lt gt AF gt button gt AF operation will appear AF operation One Shot AF 3 S
146. e on the Mode Dial lt Tv gt stands for Time value PILER a cake soa of SO id iaa a et Se ee Blurred motion Frozen action Slow shutter speed 1 30 sec Fast shutter speed 1 2000 sec Hay 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt DE WA 2 Set the desired shutter speed See Shooting Tips for advice on setting the shutter speed Ty 1 125 Turning the lt gt dial to the right sets a faster shutter speed and turning it to the left sets a slower one 3 Take the picture When you focus and press the shutter button completely the picture will be taken at the selected shutter speed ey Ee Be rr LU al J 0072 vey 11112 ISO o 1 Lert ut F Shutter Speed Display The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction However the viewfinder displays only the denominator Also 0 5 indicates 0 5 sec and 15 is 15 sec 110 Tv Conveying the Subject s Movement X Shooting Tips e To freeze the motion of a fast moving subject Use a fast shutter soeed such as 1 4000 sec to 1 500 sec To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of motion Use a medium shutter speed such as 1 250 sec to 1 30 sec Follow the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter button to take the picture If you use a telephoto lens hold it steady to prevent camera shake e To blur a flowing river or fount
147. e reduced p 127 e If ISO Auto is set the ISO speed will be ISO 400 p 94 F e For bulb exposures using a tripod and Remote Switch sold separately p 308 is recommended e You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 307 for bulb exposures When you press the remote controller s transmit button the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec later Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure 116 Changing the Metering Mode mau Four methods metering modes to measure the subject s brightness are provided Normally evaluative metering is recommended In Basic Zone modes evaluative metering is set automatically SBidcande lt ees 1 Select Metering mode Expo comp AEB 2 1 9 1 72 Under the 2 tab select Metering Auto Lighting Optimizer Ei Custom White Balance mode then press lt GED gt WE Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB Picture Style Auto Metering mode E Metering mode 2 Set the metering mode Select the metering mode then press Evaluative metering lt gt S A a CI Evaluative metering This is a general purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene Partial metering Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting etc The gray area in the left figure is where the brigh
148. e shutter button Using the Eyepiece Cover When you use the self timer bulb or Remote Switch and do not look through the viewfinder stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the image to look dark To prevent this use the eyepiece cover p 27 attached to the camera strap During Live View shooting and movie shooting attaching the eyepiece cover is unnecessary Remove the eyecup e Push the bottom of the eyecup to remove 2 Attach the eyepiece cover Slide the eyepiece cover down into the eyepiece groove to attach it e After taking the picture detach the eyepiece cover and attach the eyecup by sliding it down the eyepiece groove 308 External SpeedliteS mam EOS dedicated EX series Speedlites Basically operates like a built in flash for easy operation When an ExX series Speedlite sold separately is attached to the camera almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera In other words it is like a high output flash attached externally in place of the built in flash For detailed instructions refer to the EX series Speedlite s instruction manual This camera is a Type A camera that can use all the features of EX series Speedilites Shoe mount Speedlites Macro Lites Fil e With an EX series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings p 220 only Flash exposure compensation can be set for External flash func setting With certain EX s
149. e shutter without card ON Image review 2 sec Lens aberration correctior Red eye reduc Disable Flash control Menu items Menu settings 370 Quick Reference Guide Image Recording Quality e Select 4g1 Image quality then press lt 6 gt e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the quality then press lt gt Image recording quality Image quality Recorded pixels L 18M 5184x3456 514 4 dL 4M aM 451 dS1 ya RA oy Ba RAW Possible shots S Picture Style e Press the lt 32 gt button pee e Press the lt lt gt key to select the 0300 20 00 Picture Style then press lt G gt Fed ES INFO Detail set SET 6 Picture Style Style Description Auto Color tones optimized for the particular scene Standard Vivid colors and sharp images Portrait Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images Monochrome Black and white images e For lt N gt Neutral and lt amp gt Faithful see page 96 371 Quick Reference Guide Qa Quick Control e Press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control screen will appear Basic Zone Modes Creative Zone Modes P a T ESETT HIR T m raa oem O E dl 5 Bencaure comp AER seting A Shutter speed Aperture Shooting mode Highlight tone priority ISO speed Exposure ISO compensation M 1 125 F5 6 Lo 3200 Flash exposure AEB setting PERAE hes ber oes dalla bale compensat
150. e slave units can be treated as one flash unit or separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set The basic settings are shown below By changing the Firing group setting you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple Speedlites Built in flash settings Basic settings Built in flash CustWireless I Flash mode E TTL Il eit E E TTL Il meter Evaluative Wireless func Wireless func Channel 1 Fring group RAN Channel Same as slave units a All Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit This is convenient when you need a large flash output All the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure No matter what the slave ID is A B or C all the slave units will fire as one group Built in flash settings Set Firing group to a All then Flash mode E TTLII take the picture Wireless func Channel Firing group All exp comp 2 1 81 oe MEN Ba 235 Custom Wireless Flash Shooting a A B Multiple slave units in multiple groups Divide the slave units into groups A and B and change the flash ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect Refer to your Speedlite s instruction manual to set one slave unit s slave ID to A Group A and the other slave unit s ID to B Group B and position them as shown in the illustration Built in flash settings 1 Select Wireless func Built in flash
151. ed in a blue frame Press the lt E Q gt button again to switch to the 9 image index display e Pressing the lt amp gt button will switch the display from 9 images to 4 images and then to 1 image Ee Press the lt lt gt gt key to move the blue ba Ps frame to select an image Cf Le S Turning the lt gt dial will display the next screen or previous image pj y i e Press lt gt and the selected image will be displayed as a single image 3 Select an image 242 gt Searching for Images Quickly Jump through Images Jump Display With the single image display you can turn the lt gt dial to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set adaaullee ees Select Image jump w 7 3 Histogram disp Brightness e Under the gt 2 tab select Image Image jump w w Of Slide show jump w 23 then press lt gt Rating Image jump w a Select the jump method Jump 10 images Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the jump method then press lt gt Display images one by one Jump 10 images Jump 100 images Display by date Display by folder Display movies only Display stills only Display by image rating p 248 Turn the lt gt dial to select 3 Browse by jumping z e Press the lt gt gt button to play back images On the single image display turn the lt gt dial JAN oO O AARAA
152. editing screen p 256 Play back position Playback time minutes seconds You can adjust the built in speaker s p 254 volume by turning the lt gt dial Pressing the lt MENU gt button returns to the single image display When background music is set the movie s sound will not be played Playback with the Touch Screen a Tap gt at the center of the screen gt The movie will start playing e To oa the movie playback panel tap lt Gail gt on the upper left of the screen To pause the movie while it is playing tap the screen The movie playback panel will also appear E e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 the continuous playback time at 23 C 73 F will be as follows approx 2 hr 30 min e f you took a still photo while you shot the movie the still photo will be displayed for approx 1 sec during the movie playback 299 X Editing a Movie s First and Last Scenes m You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie except video snapshots in 1 sec increments 1 On the movie playback screen select X The editing screen will be displayed gt Specify the part to be edited out e Select either 81 Cut beginning or Ex Cut end then press lt gt Press the lt lt P gt key to see the previous or next frames Holding it down will fast forward the frames e After deciding which part to edit out press lt gt The portion highlighted in blue
153. eeeeeeeeseeeeeas 262 en Protecting IMAG SS cist es ota ok Nita lal ie Saas 266 MP ERASING IMAG CS S misna a nies 268 INFO Shooting Information Display cc cccccccseeesseeeeseeeeeeees 270 10 Post Processing Images 273 Applying Creative Filters to the IMage cscceseeeteeeeeeees 274 Ei Resizing a JPEG Image senarta i 277 11 Printing Images 279 Preparing to PIDU seit ce ccectscsn ssw ld ieaiai ea ak 280 AE PININ G ai s a ee ade lan 282 Cropping the Mage een aa a renee ee er 287 i Digital Print Order Format DPOF seeen 289 D Direct Printing with DPOF esessseseesesieessriiersrsrurirerrsrrrirrsesrnren 292 lal Specifying Images for a PHOtobOOK c cecceeeeeeeeesteeeeneees 293 14 Contents 12 Customizing the Camera Setting CUSTOM FUNCHONS ess eaaa 296 Custom Function STINGS sisser aa aaa 298 GFA T EXPOSING auetan i aay hd sade atuicenhiaatisteranecntenseunss 298 CFMI IMAGE enana etree re rrrrre errr ter reer 299 C Fn IIl Autofocus Drive cece eee eeeceeeeteneeteeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 CPA JIV One rallon One lS sentii gels 301 Registering My Men scanu a aaa 303 13 Reference 305 Using a Household Power Outlet ccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 306 Remote Control Shooting sssssssesesssesseeerereeertnrrnrrrrnnnnnnnnnneene 307 External Speedltes e n aara a a a 309 Using Eye Fi Cards ccccccccesesesennencneeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesese
154. een will appear Select the shooting mode Press the lt AF gt or lt lt P gt key to select the shooting mode icon e Turn the lt gt dial to select a o J Gn 6 shooting mode Night Portrait B Fm Standard setting n e You can also select the shooting J zgi B mode icon and press lt amp gt to display Night Portrait a selection of shooting modes from For portrait shots with which you can select one illuminated night scenes in the background Available Shooting Modes in the lt SCN gt Mode Shooting Mode 2 Night Portrait Handheld Night Scene HDR Backlight Control 71 Ei Shooting Night Portraits With a Tripod mm To shoot people at night and obtain a natural looking night scene in the background use the lt B gt Night Portrait mode Bi a Night Portrait For portrait shots with illuminated night scenes in the background Ej Night Portrait The use of a tripod i recommended Fin Standard setting GE an ac 514 X Shooting Tips e Use a wide angle lens and a tripod When using a zoom lens use the wide angle end to obtain a wide night view Also use a tripod to prevent camera shake e Check the subject s brightness Under low light the built in flash will fire automatically to obtain a good exposure of the subject You should then play back the image to check the image brightness If the subject looks dark move nearer a
155. elect lt a RO 2 elect lt H gt CS e Press the lt lt P gt key or turn the 2m lt gt dial to select lt H gt continuous shooting then press lt gt 3 Take the picture e The camera shoots continuously O Sy 0 Ge 2 while you hold down the shutter button completely Drive mode Continuous shooting X Shooting Tips e Also set the AF operation p 97 matching the subject For a moving subject When Al Servo AF is set focusing will be continuous during continuous shooting For still subjects When One Shot AF is set the camera will focus only once during continuous shooting e Flash can also be used Since the flash will require recycling time the continuous shooting speed will be slower 104 Continuous Shooting WD e The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 5 shots per second is achieved with a shutter speed of 1 500 sec or faster and at the maximum aperture differs depending on the lens The continuous shooting speed may decrease due to shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness lens flash use etc With the following lenses 5 shots per second is achieved with One Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off EF300mm f 4L IS USM EF28 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM and EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM e In Al Servo AF operation the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used
156. elect the AF operation Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the desired AF operation then press lt gt Focus the subject Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway The camera will then autofocus in the selected AF operation ONE SHOT AIFOCUS AI SERVO 97 AF Changing the Autofocus Operation SSS ee One Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus only once When focus is achieved the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights up briefly in red and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will also light up e With evaluative metering p 117 the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved While you hold down the shutter button halfway the focus will be locked You can then recompose the shot if desired E e f focus cannot be achieved the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will blink If this occurs the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely Recompose the picture and try to focus again Or see Subjects Difficult to Focus p 103 e f 1 Beep is set to Disable the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved Al Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing While you hold down the sh
157. en set for another shooting mode the picture will be recorded in L e f you shoot a moving subject the subject s movement may leave afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark e The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns lattice stripes etc flat or single tone images or greatly misaligned shots caused by camera shake e Compared to normal shooting recording the image to the card will take longer During the processing of the images BUSY will be displayed and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed e If the shooting mode is set to lt gt or lt amp gt direct printing p 280 is not possible 19 Q Quick Control mem Example Portrait mode In Basic Zone modes when the shooting settings screen is displayed you can press the lt Q gt button to display the Quick Control screen The table below Daylight indicates the functions that can be set D i with the Quick Control screen in each Ambience based shots Basic Zone mode 1 Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode 2 Press the lt Q gt button 610 gt The Quick Control screen will appear Set the function Press the lt lt gt gt key to select a function This step is not necessary in the lt J gt and lt gt modes The selected function and Feature guide p 52 will appear Press the lt lt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to change the se
158. en a circle AF points A O O AE lock P EE AANO oan Focus confirmation light Flash ready Max burst Flash exposure compensation Monochrome shooting Shutter speed ISO speed Aperture Exposure level indicator 374 Quick Reference Guide Basic Zone Modes f X All the settings necessary for shooting are set automatically You just press the shutter button and the camera does the rest G Scene Intelligent Auto 4 Sports Flash Off SCN Special scene Creative Auto Ei Night Portrait Portrait Handheld Night Scene 2A Landscape a HDR Backlight Control W Close up e At the SCN position press the lt Q gt button select the shooting mode icon with lt lt gt gt key and turn the lt gt dial to set the shooting mode 4 Using the Built in Flash Basic Zone Modes If necessary the built in flash will be raised and fire automatically in low light or backlit conditions except in the lt GJ gt lt aa gt lt gt lt E gt lt j gt modes e Press the lt 54 gt button to raise the built in flash then shoot 375 Quick Reference Guide Creative Zone Modes You can change the camera settings as desired to shoot in various ways P Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture in the same way as the lt 3 gt mode e Set the Mode Dial to lt P gt Tv Shutter priority AE e Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt
159. en operations the beeper suddenly sounds softer Check if your finger is covering the speaker p 21 Touch screen operation is not possible Check if Enable is set with 3 Touch control p 55 Display Problems The menu screen shows few tabs and options e In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode certain tabs and menu options are not displayed Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode p 46 The file name s first character is an underscore _ Set the color space to sRGB If Adobe RGB is set the first character will be an underscore p 141 The file name starts with MVI _ e Itis a movie file p 209 The file numbering does not start from 0001 e Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 208 Troubleshooting Guide ee The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect e Make sure the correct date and time has been set p 36 Check the time zone and daylight savings time p 36 The date and time is not in the picture e The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture The date and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting information When printing you can imprint the date and time in the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information p 285 is displayed e Ifthe card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera can display will be displayed p
160. eparately set to a 2 sec delay press the transmit button and the mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec later 142 Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake QD e In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day take the picture promptly after mirror lockup e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components e f you use the self timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror lockup keep pressing the shutter button completely self timer delay time bulb exposure time If you let go of the shutter button during the self timer countdown there will be a shutter release sound but no picture will be taken El Even if lt H gt or lt Wc gt is set for drive mode single shooting will take effect When 83 High ISO speed NR is set to Multi Shot Noise Reduction four continuous shots will be taken for the single picture regardless of the 5 Mirror lockup setting e If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up it will go back down automatically Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the mirror again 143 shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera s LCD monitor This is called Live View shooting If you handhold the camera
161. eries Speedlites Shutter synchronization is also settable e If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite the flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera s LCD monitor will change from to 7 e If the Speedlite s Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to TTL autoflash the flash will fire at full output only 309 External Speedlites Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX series With an EZ E EG ML TL series Speedlite set in TTL or A TTL autoflash mode the flash can be fired at full output only Set the camera s shooting mode to lt M gt manual exposure or lt Av gt aperture priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting e When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode shoot in the manual flash mode Using Non Canon Flash Units Sync Speed The camera can synchronize with compact non Canon flash units at 1 200 sec or slower shutter speeds Use a sync speed slower than 1 200 sec Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes properly with the camera Cautions for Live View shooting A non Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting GD e If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result e Do not attach a high voltage flash unit on the camera s hot shoe It may not fire 310 Using Eye Fi Cards m
162. ery Magazine CA PS700 Battery Grip BGM E8L for two BGM E8A for BG E8 LP E8 battery packs _ size AA LR6 batteries 316 System Map Remote GPS Receiver Controller Remote Switch GP E2 RC 6 RS 60E3 EF lenses EF S lenses m aD E e TT m fC HDMI Cable T HTC 100 2 9 m 9 5 ft Stereo AV Cable AVC DC400ST TV Video 1 3 m 4 3 ft EOS DIGITAL 4 Do P ictBridge compatible printer Solution Disk q CEEE H Interface Cable 1 3 m 4 3 ft Interface Cable IFC 200U 500U 1 9 m 6 2 ft 4 7 m 15 4 ft lt L gt SD SDHC SDXC memory card Card reader Computer All cable lengths given are approximate figures Semi Hard Case EH22 L EH24 L 317 720 Menu Settings mE For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting Shooting 1 Red Page 4L L 4M M S1 S1 82 83 G aL 0 Enable Touch to Disable Release shutter Enable Disable 204 without card Off 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Hold Image quality Lens aberration Peripheral illumination Enable Disable 129 correction Chromatic aberration Enable Disable Red eye reduction Disable Enable 108 Flash firing E TTL II metering Flash sync speed in Av mode Built in flash settings 218 External flash function settings External flash C Fn settings Clear settings Not selectable if the lt E gt or lt g gt shooting mode Multi Shot N
163. est card and testing standards 3 2 aspect ratio ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style These figures will vary depending on the subject card brand aspect ratio ISO speed Picture Style Custom Functions and other settings Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS I compatible 8 GB card based on Canon s testing standards 89 tE Setting the Image Recording Quality E E E 2 FAQ e want to select the image recording quality matching the paper size for printing Refer to the diagram on the left when choosing the image recording quality If you want to crop the image selecting a A3 42x29 7cm higher quality more pixels such as ML 16 5x11 7in SM al AL aM AL or is recommended 2 is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame 3 is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web A4 29 7x21cm 11 7x8 3in S te 12 7x8 9cm 5 0x3 5in e What s the difference between 4 Fine and d Normal It indicates a different image quality due to a different compression rate Even with the same number of pixels the image has higher image quality If al is selected the image quality will be slightly lower but more images can be saved to the card Both 2 and 3 have d quality e was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots indicated Depending on the shooting conditions you may be able to take more shots than was indicated It may also be fewer than indicated The
164. et cloth e Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data e Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction e The camera contains precision electronic circuitry Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself e Do not block the mirror operation with your finger etc Doing so may cause a malfunction e Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens viewfinder reflex mirror and focusing screen Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens For stubborn dirt take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center e Do not touch the camera s electrical contacts with your fingers This is to prevent the contacts from corroding Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation e f the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room condensation may form on the camera and internal parts To prevent condensation first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag e f condensation forms on the camera do not use the camera This is to avoid damaging the camera If there is condensation remove the lens card
165. etely the picture will be taken Red eye reduc Disable Enable Fl e The red eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red eye reduction lamp when the room is well lit or when you are close to the subject When you press the shutter button halfway the scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and turn off For best results take the picture after this scale display turns off e The effectiveness of red eye reduction varies depending on the subject 108 Advanced Shooting This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more ways to shoot creatively e The first half of this chapter explains how to use the lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt M gt modes on the Mode Dial e All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in the lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt M gt modes To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode see page 314 The x mark shown on the right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes p 24 PN About the Main Dial Pointer The pointer icon lt N gt displayed 1 125 4 i together with the shutter speed aperture setting or exposure compensation amount indicates that you can turn the lt gt dial to adjust the respective setting Tv Conveying the Subject s Movement mum You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the lt Tv gt Shutter priority AE mod
166. ew Shooting e Live View shooting e Autofocusing AF methods e Continuous AF e Touch Shutter e Aspect ratio e Grid display e Quick Control e Creative filters Movie Shooting e Movie shooting e Movie Servo AF e Sound recording e Grid display e Manual exposure e Still photo shooting Quick Control e Video snapshot gt p 121 gt p 123 gt p 107 gt p 120 gt p 124 gt p 309 gt p 218 gt p 229 gt p 145 gt p 159 gt p 156 gt p 168 gt p 157 gt p 156 gt p 151 gt p 152 gt p 173 gt p 196 gt p 198 gt p 198 gt p 177 gt p 182 gt p 184 gt p 187 Index to Features Playback e Image review time e Single image display e Shooting information display e Index display e Image browsing Jump display e Magnified view e Image rotate e Rating e Movie playback e Editing out movie s first last scene e Slide show e Viewing images on TV e Protect e Erase Quick Control Image Editing e Creative filters e Resize Printing e PictBridge e Print Order DPOF e Photobook Set up Customization gt p 204 gt p 84 gt p 270 gt p 242 gt p 243 gt p 244 gt p 247 gt p 248 gt p 254 gt p 256 gt p 258 gt p 262 gt p 266 gt p 268 gt p 250 gt p 274 gt p 277 gt p 282 gt p 289 gt p 293 e Custom Functions C Fn gt p 296 e My Menu Software e Downloading ima
167. exposure noise reduction O O OJO High ISO speed noise reduction 0o lOlOloOO Highlight tone priority OIOIOIOI os Color SRGB ooooooooooo o OoOlololoieio s space Adobe RGB OIOIOIO O One Shot AF OJOJOO Afri Al Servo AF OOO i Focusing Al Focus AF O O O O aFQuick 7 AF point selection e oo ooo O O OC O AFQuick AF assist beam e e e O O O O 1 The amp icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode 2 EM AL or cannot be selected 3 Settable only for manual exposures 4 Set automatically in Basic Zone modes 5 Settable only in Creative Zone modes 314 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode LE SSS SSS SSS SSSI Basic Zone Creative Zone Movie ATI ele Gt Dla y ee OCN Tv AM os O Shears POO Metering Evaluative metering 0 0 mode Metering mode selection Program shift O 5 Other than M Exposure compensation AEB AE lock Depth of field preview Exposure O 0 5 O 10 10 10 10 Single shooting Continuous shooting Drive 10 sec W2 2 sec Wc Continuous O SO OJSOJ O OJOJ O O O O O U O O O O O OIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIO OOOO OJOIOIOJO OIOIOIOIO OJOIOIOJO OIOIOIOIO OIOIOIOIO OlOIOIOIOIOIOIOJ O OI
168. f lt gt continuous shooting p 104 is set and you press the shutter button completely the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously in this sequence standard exposure decreased exposure and increased exposure Using AEB with lt LJ gt single shooting Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed shots The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following sequence standard exposure decreased exposure and increased exposure e Using AEB with the self timer or a remote controller sold separately With the self timer or a remote control shooting lt 8 gt or lt W2 gt you can take three continuous shots after a 10 sec or 2 sec delay With lt Wc gt p 106 set the number of continuous shots will be three times the number set 4D e AEB cannot be used with flash Multi Shot Noise Reduction Creative filters or bulb exposures e If 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 125 is set to any setting other than Disable the AEB s effect may be minimal 122 Locking the Exposure mememe You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting Press the lt gt button to lock the exposure then recompose and take the shot This is called AE lock It is effective for backlit subjects A Cp Focus the subject 48 lt A e Press the shu
169. f the registered items Delete item items deletes one item at a time and Delete all items deletes all registered items e Display from My Menu When Enable is set the tab will be displayed first when you display the menu screen 303 13 Reference This chapter provides reference information for camera features system accessories etc F Certification Logo If you select 4 Certification Logo Display and press lt gt some of the logos of the camera s certifications will appear Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual on the camera body or on the camera s package Using a Household Power Outlet mu With AC Adapter Kit ACK E8 sold separately you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining battery level 1 Connect the power cord Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration e After using the camera unplug the power plug from the power outlet Connect the DC Coupler Connect the DC cord s plug to the DC Coupler 3 Insert the DC Coupler Open the cover and insert the DC Coupler until it locks in place A Push in the DC cord Open the DC cord hole cover and install the cord as shown e Close the cover dD Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera s power switch is set to lt ON gt 306 Remote Control Shoo
170. fire electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it e Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes skin and clothing It can cause blindness or skin problems If the battery leakage contacts your eyes skin or clothing flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it See a physician immediately e Do not leave any cords near a heat source It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time Even if the camera does not feel too hot prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness blistering or low temperature contact burns Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin or when using the camera in very hot places e Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle It may cause an accident e Do not fire the flash near a person s eyes It may impair the person s vision When using flash to photograph an infant keep at least 1 meter 3 3 feet away 349 Safety Precautions e When the camera or accessories are not in use make sure to remove the battery and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing This is to prevent electrical shock excessive heat fire or corrosion e Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas This is to prevent an explosion or a fire e f you drop the equipment and the
171. ft focus lens A special effect filter is used Noise spots banding etc appears on the screen during AF QD e If focus is not achieved with the above shooting conditions set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and focus manually e If you use AF with any of the following lenses using Quick mode is recommended If you use the X Tracking FlexiZone Multi or FlexiZone Single for AF it may take a longer time to achieve focus or the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus EF50mm f 1 4 USM EF50mm f 1 8 Il EF 50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 Ill EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 III USM For information on discontinued lenses refer to your local Canon Web site 165 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method eee Quick Mode AF Quick The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One Shot AF operation p 98 using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting Although you can focus the target subject quickly the Live View image will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation You can use nine AF points to focus automatically selected You can also select one AF point to focus and focus only the area covered by that AF point manually selected In Basic Zone modes the AF point will be selected automatically You cannot select the AF point AF point 1 Display the Live View image J vi A Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor e The
172. g the camera around If the card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 208 If a card related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor remove and reinsert the card If the error persists use a different card If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera p 48 The card may then return to normal Do not touch the card s contacts with your fingers or metal objects Using the LCD Monitor mx After you flip out the LCD monitor you can set menu functions use Live View shooting shoot movies and play back images and movies You can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor 1 Flip out the LCD monitor P 2 Rotate the LCD monitor Ka When the LCD monitor is swung out you can rotate it up or down or face it forward toward the subject e The indicated angle is only approximate Face it toward you Normally face the LCD monitor toward you WD Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor ir e When not using the camera close the LCD monitor with the screen facing inward This will protect the screen e During Live View shooting or movie shooting facing the LCD monitor toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen e Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor the display may turn off right before the LCD mon
173. g the nine AF points e To make it easier to focus a moving subject set the camera to automatic AF point selection and Al Servo AF p 98 The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject During autofocusing if the subject moves away from the center AF point focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point AF Assist Beam with the Built in Flash Under low light conditions when you press the shutter button halfway the built in flash fires a brief burst of flashes It illuminates the subject to enable easier autofocusing Fl e The AF assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes lt gt lt 24 gt and lt gt e The AF assist beam cannot be emitted with Al Servo AF operation e The effective range of the AF assist beam emitted by the built in flash is approx 4 meters 13 1 feet In Creative Zone modes when you raise the built in flash with the lt 4 gt button p 107 the AF assist beam will be emitted when necessary Note that depending on the setting for 4 AF assist beam firing under 4 Custom Functions C Fn AF beam will not be emitted p 300 101 Selecting the AF Point ee AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures With maximum apertures up to f 5 6 Cross type focusing vertical and horizontal lines detected simultaneously is possible with all AF points With certain lenses see below the off center AF poi
174. gent Auto Take the picture e Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD monitor F Fe e After taking the picture retract the built in flash by pushing it down with your fingers The lt 3 gt mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature outdoor and sunset scenes If the desired color tone is not obtained use a Creative Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than lt Al gt and shoot p 95 FAQ The focus confirmation light lt gt blinks and focus is not achieved Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast then press the shutter button halfway p 43 If you are too close to the subject move away and try again Multiple AF points flash simultaneously This indicates that focus is achieved at all those AF points When the AF point covering the desired subject flashes take the picture The beeper continues to beep softly The focus confirmation light lt gt does not light up It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject The focus confirmation light lt gt does not light up You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject Note that focus lock p 61 will not work in this case Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to lt MF gt manual focus set it to lt AF gt autofocus
175. ges to a personal computer gt p 303 gt p 361 e Software instruction manual p 367 9 ContentS memm Introduction 2 KE ONECRK EIS kortene aa e ENR 3 Conventions Used in this Manual cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenensneeeeeeeeees 4 OHarra gee tte te cane cates a elias ends ad ea eeN 5 Contents ata GlanCe sedari R a E 6 IAG OX TO Featire S noc aan n O 8 Handing PIGCAullONS sioa E 16 Quick Stat GUJE assia a ue ewesiuelietsaentisa 18 Nomenclalil Ganso a a E E N 20 1 Getting Started 27 Charging the Battery stccicnccciascicasecwevivesstehansatbidshdsadenducaestarsnivaceceden 28 Installing and Removing the Battery sssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Installing and Removing the Card 0 0 ccceceeeeeeeee ete teeeeeeeeeneneeaes 31 Using the ECD MONO csser estes Sele Oat ictal ety 33 TRITON ON the POWE aiea anaia aai 34 Setting the Time Zone Date and Time ccccccceeceeceeseeaeeeeeeaeens 36 Selecting the Interface Language cccccceeseeeeeeenencneeeeeeeeeeees 38 Attaching and Detaching a Lens ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee ee ae eee eeeeeeeeeees 39 About the Lens Image Stabilizer ccccececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneaes 41 BASIC ODE ANON en a e tence vmen das eamertaies 42 Q Quick Control for Shooting FUNCTIONS c cccccseesseeetseeseeens 44 MAN Menu Operations 2ivecce ci sicncde ited cede 46 Formatting the C ANC 20 2 fcnn tsa csssuas tates e AR 48 Switching th
176. h America Japan Korea Mexico etc m s For areas where the TV format is PAL Europe Russia China Australia etc 24 Mainly for motion pictures 185 M4 Setting the Movie recording Size Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Movie Recording Total Recording Time approx File Size Size 4GB Card 8 GB Card 16 GB Card approx 640x480 1 hr 32 min 82 5 MB min e About Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB you can keep shooting without interruption During movie shooting approx 30 sec before the movie reaches the 4 GB file size the elapsed shooting time displayed in the movie shooting screen will start blinking If you keep shooting the movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB a new movie file will be created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking When you play back the movie you will have to play each movie file individually Movie files cannot play back consecutively automatically After the movie playback ends select the next movie to be played e Movie Shooting Time Limit The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min 59 sec If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically You can resume movie shooting by pressing the lt gt button A new movie file is recorded 4 An increase of the camera s internal temperature may cause movie shooting to stop before
177. h to 50 mm or longer Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and set the focus to infinity co If the lens has no distance scale look at the front of the lens and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way Obtain the Dust Delete Data Select Dust Delete Data ooo He FF 2 Dust Delete Data Under the 33 tab select Dust ISO Auto Max 6400 Long exp noise reduction OFF High ISO speed NR ol Delete Data then press lt gt Dust Delete Data 2 Select OK Obtain data for removing e Select OK and press lt gt After dust using software the automatic self cleaning of the Refer to manual for details f sensor is performed a message will PSEA ORI i appear Although there will be a Cancel OK shutter sound during the cleaning a picture is not taken Dust Delete Data oO Fully press the shutter Sensor cleaning button when ready 224 MN Appending Dust Delete Data Dust Delete Data Data obtained 3 Photograph a solid white object e At a distance of 20 cm 30 cm 0 7 ft 1 0 ft fill the viewfinder with a patternless solid white object and take a picture gt The picture will be taken in aperture priority AE mode at an aperture of f 22 Since the image will not be saved the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera gt When the picture is taken the camera will star
178. he same color Turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt F e lt AF gt stands for Autofocus M e If itis set to lt MF gt manual focus autofocus will not operate STABILIZER Remove the front lens cap Minimizing Dust When changing lenses do it quickly in a place with minimal dust When storing the camera without a lens attached be sure to attach the body cap to the camera e Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it 39 Attaching and Detaching a Lens About Zooming To zoom turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers If you want to zoom do it before focusing Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus While pressing the lens release button turn the lens as shown by the arrows e Turn the lens until it stops then detach it e Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens QD e Do not look at the sun directly through any lens Doing so may cause loss of vision e When attaching or detaching a lens set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt e If the front part focusing ring of the lens rotates during autofocusing do not touch the rotating part e If you purchased a lens kit with the EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM or EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens see Handling Precautions on page 346 F Image
179. he lens WZ a Uff VE HEE as x a Uf ES Ss ee a ae sss 25 E a A n F it DSSS l S Blurred background Sharp foreground and background With a low aperture f number f 5 6 With a high aperture f number f 32 H FOE 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt oN 2 Set the desired aperture The higher the f number the wider the depth of field where sharper focus is obtained in both the foreground and background Turning the lt gt dial to the right will set a higher f number smaller aperture opening and turning it to the left will set a lower f number larger aperture opening F5 64 A 3 2064 8 1 02 23 Take the picture e Focus and press the shutter button completely The picture will be taken with the selected aperture a SR R Qual T 11112 ISO HHT Fl Aperture Display The higher the f number the smaller the aperture opening will be The apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens If no lens is attached to the camera 00 will be displayed for the aperture 112 Av Changing the Depth of Field A X Shooting Tips e When using an aperture with a high f number or shooting in low light scenes note that camera shake can occur A higher aperture f number will make the shutter speed slower Under low light the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec In such cases increase the ISO speed and hold the camera s
180. he picture after you press the shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder shooting Ifthe camera is not operated for a prolonged period the power will turn off automatically as set with 2 Auto power off p 205 If 2 Auto power off is set to Disable Live View shooting will end automatically after approx 30 min Camera power remains on e With the stereo AV cable AVC DC400ST sold separately or HDMI cable HTC 100 sold separately you can display the Live View image ona TV p 262 265 147 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor C O Information Display Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change AF point Quick AF Battery check Possible shots Histogram AF method Auto Lighting Shooting mode ce ep Optimizer Quick Control Drive mode Metering mode hime WVhite balance Image recording Mamae 2a 8 Picture Style quality SEa Built in flash im Creative filters settings e Eye Fi card transmission selection AF point status Switch to auto Ippe Touch shutter Er Exposure AE lock simulation 4 Flash ready Magnified view Flash off Shutter speed AEB FEB l Flash exposure compensation Multi Shot Noise Aperture Reduction ISO speed Exposure level indicator AEB range Digital compass Highlight tone priority GPS connection indicator F e When lt EM gt is displayed in white
181. he shutter speed turn the lt gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate lt P gt e T60 I50 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec eBo D5 m4 1 4000 sec 1 30 sec e To set the aperture hold down the lt Av 4 gt button and turn the lt s7 gt dial Set the ISO speed e Press the lt ISO gt button and press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the ISO speed e For details on the ISO speed see the next page lt A gt lt gt 177 Shooting Movies Focus and shoot the movie e The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 174 ISO speed during manual exposure shooting e With Auto the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 ISO 6400 e You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 ISO 6400 in whole stop increments Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 2 ISO expansion is set to 1 On the manual setting range will expand so you can also select H equivalent to ISO 12800 e Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable the ISO speed will be ISO 200 ISO 6400 d Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise it is designated as an expanded ISO speed displayed as H e Under 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 2 ISO expansion is set to 1 On and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the manual setti
182. he telephoto end will make the subject look larger 69 A Shooting Moving Subjects ma To photograph a moving subject whether it is a child running or a moving vehicle use the lt gt Sports mode j Sports Fi Standard setting HO Default setting GO lt x au 514 X Shooting Tips e Use a telephoto lens Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar e Use the center AF point to focus Aim the center AF point over the subject then press the shutter button halfway to autofocus During autofocusing the beeper will continue beeping softly If focus cannot be achieved the focus confirmation light lt gt will blink The default setting is lt gt Continuous shooting When you want to take the picture press the shutter button completely If you hold down the shutter button continuous shooting max approx 5 shots per sec and autofocusing will take effect to capture the movement of the subject 4D Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur the viewfinder s shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink Hold the camera steady and shoot 70 SCN Special Scene Mode memmen Select Night Portrait Handheld Night Scene or HDR Backlight Control shooting mode The camera sets everything to suit the selected shooting mode Hee 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt SCN gt DE J Press the lt Q gt button 610 a gt The Quick Control scr
183. hen you shoot at high ISO speeds noise such as dots of light and banding may become noticeable Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image e f Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period the camera s internal temperature may rise and image quality may deteriorate Stop Live View shooting when not shooting images e If you shoot a long exposure while the camera s internal temperature is high image quality may deteriorate Stop Live View shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again White lt M gt and Red lt i gt Internal Temperature Warning e If the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting or under a high ambient temperature a white icon lt M gt will appear If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed the image quality of still photos may deteriorate It is recommended to temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again Ifthe camera s internal temperature further increases while the white icon lt gt is displayed a red icon lt gt will start blinking This blinking icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while e Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
184. hooting are on pages 200 and 201 If necessary also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages 171 and 172 El e Movie related settings are under the D 1 and Om 2 tabs p 196 e A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie If the file size exceeds 4 GB a new file will be automatically created e The movie image s field of view is approx 100 with movie recording size set to 920 e The sound will be recorded in stereo by the camera s built in microphone p 174 e Most commercially available external stereo microphones with a 3 5 mm diameter miniplug can be connected to the camera If an external microphone has been connected to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 20 it will be given priority over the built in microphone e You can use Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately p 307 to start and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is lt gt Set the shooting timing switch to lt 2 gt 2 sec delay then press the transmit button If the switch is set to lt gt immediate shooting still photo shooting will take effect e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 the total movie shooting time will be as follows approx 1 hr 40 min at room temperature 23 C 73 F and approx 1 hr 20 min at low temperature 0 C 32 F e The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting only when using a super telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed since the secon
185. ht conditions lt is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake However while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash the background may come out dark E 1 200 1 200 sec fixed The flash sync speed is fixed at 1 200 sec This more effectively prevents subject blur and camera shake than with 1 200 1 60 sec auto However in low light the subject s background will come out darker than with 1 200 1 60 sec auto If 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed is set high speed sync is not possible in the lt AV gt mode 219 MEM Setting the Flash a a Built in flash settings and External flash func setting You can set the functions in the table below The functions displayed under External flash func setting will vary depending on the Speedlite model Pinch control Select Built in flash settings or Flash firing Enable External flash func setting ae I pct ipu gt The flash functions will be displayed ash SNC speed In AV Mode k Built in flash settings With Built in flash settings the External ae func setting highlighted functions can be selected External flash C Fn setting Clear settings IME Ni fa and set Sample screen Flash mode Wireless functions Built in flash settings External flash func setting Flash zoom ETTL OFF zoom ITO Flash coverage FEB Flash exposure compensation Shutter synchronization Built in flash NormalFiring Shutter sync
186. ic Zone modes to prevent spoiled shots advanced function settings cannot be changed However in the lt P gt Program AE mode you can set various functions and be more creative e Inthe lt P gt mode the camera sets the shutter speed and aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure e The difference between the Basic Zone modes and lt P gt is explained on page 314 The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in the lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt M gt modes explained in Chapter 4 The mark shown on the right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes p 24 lt P gt stands for Program AE stands for Auto Exposure P Program AE m The camera automatically sets the shutter soeed and aperture to suit the subject s brightness This is called Program AE 1 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt P gt 2 Focus the subject Look through the viewfinder and aim the selected AF point over the subject Then press the shutter button halfway gt The dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights up briefly in red and the focus confirmation light lt gt on the viewfinder s bottom right lights up in One Shot AF mode The shutter speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder 3 Check the display e A standard exposure will be obtained as long as the shutter speed and aperture display do not
187. ing 1 or 3 press the lt gt button for One Shot AF Also using the touch shutter will take a picture without autofocusing e With setting 2 press the shutter button halfway for One Shot AF 301 mM Custom Function Settings eae C Fn 7 Assign SET button You can assign a frequently used function to lt gt Press lt gt when the camera is ready to shoot 0 1 Normal disabled Image quality Press lt 6 1 gt to display the image recording quality setting screen on the LCD monitor Select the desired image recording quality then press lt G1 gt Flash exposure compensation When you press lt amp gt the flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear Set the flash exposure compensation then press lt 6 gt LCD monitor On Off Press lt gt to turn on or off the LCD monitor Menu display Press lt gt to display the menu screen ISO speed The ISO speed setting screen will appear Press the lt lt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to change the ISO speed You can also refer to the viewfinder to set the ISO speed C Fn 8 LCD display when power ON 0 Display on When the power switch is turned on the shooting settings will be displayed p 50 Previous display status If you pressed the lt INFO gt button and turned off the camera while the LCD monitor was off the shooting settings will not be displayed when you turn on the camera again This hel
188. ing when focus is achieved Manual With AE lock button Electronically controlled focal plane shutter 1 4000 sec to 30 sec Total shutter speed range Available range varies by shooting mode Bulb X sync at 1 200 sec Retractable auto pop up flash Guide No Approx 13 43 ISO 100 in meters feet Flash coverage Approx 17mm lens angle of view Recycling time approx 3 sec Wireless master function provided EX series Speedlite Flash functions settable with the camera E TTL Il autoflash 2 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments Provided None Single shooting continuous shooting self timer with 10 sec or 2 sec delay and 10 sec delay with continuous shooting Max approx 5 shots sec JPEG Large Fine 22 30 shots RAW 6 6 shots RAW JPEG Large Fine 3 3 shots Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS I compatible 8 GB card based on Canon s testing standards Figures are based on Canon s testing standards ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style using an 8 GB card 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 Hybrid CMOS AF System Face Tracking FlexiZone Multi FlexiZone Single Phase difference detection Quick mode Manual focusing approx 5x 10x magnification possible Focusing brightness range EV 1 18 at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Specifications Continuous AF Provided Touch shutter Provided Metering modes Real time metering with image sensor Evaluative metering 815 zones Partial metering approx
189. ion i Auto Lightin jeh ia m e ela Optimizer g operation aA 2 W hite Dail e me ETIEN Built in flash settings 5 maL 19M5184x3456 514 balance ew Sil Image recording Return quality Drive mode White balance bracketing White balance correction Metering mode e In Basic Zone modes the settable functions differ depending on the shooting mode Press the lt lt gt gt key to select a function then turn the lt gt dial to set it 372 Quick Reference Guide Nomenclature Power switch D Dial lt ISO gt ISO speed setting button Be OX lt gt ENO Main Dial O 5 Q LAA S hutter button Focus mode switch lt Q gt Quick Control button lt gt AE lock button lt E gt AF point selection button lt gt Live View shooting Movie shooting button lt gt N La A Cross keys aa ee Access lamp lt Avii4 gt Aperture E xposure compensation button lt 1 gt Setting button 373 Quick Reference Guide _ LSS Shooting Settings Shutter speed Aperture Shooting mode Exposure level E VALI iia I Auto Lighting indicator Optimizer White balance Picture Style AF operation ISO speed Built in flash Settings Image recording quality Possible shots Quick Control icon Battery check l imam a a CJ Metering mode OK i Not good Drive mode Viewfinder Information AF point activation indicator lt gt L S pot metering r
190. ion cannot be set grayed out while the built in flash is raised in the lt gt or lt gt mode If flash is used this setting will not be applied 65 Creative Auto Shooting E E EE eee 3 Drive mode Turn the lt gt dial to set it as desired You can also select it from a list by pressing lt 1 gt lt L gt Single shooting Shoot one image at a time lt H gt Continuous shooting While you hold down the shutter button completely shots will be taken continuously You can shoot up to approx 5 shots per sec lt i gt Self timer 10sec remote The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the shutter button A remote controller can also be used lt 2 gt Self timer 2sec The picture is taken 2 seconds after you press the shutter button lt c gt Self timer Continuous Press the lt AV gt key to set the number of multiple shots 2 to 10 to be taken with the self timer 10 seconds after you press the shutter button the set number of multiple shots will be taken 4 Flash firing Turn the lt gt dial to set it as desired You can also select it from a list by pressing lt gt lt gt Auto flash The flash fires automatically when necessary lt gt Flashon_ The flash fires at all times lt gt Flash off The flash is disabled GD If you use an external Speedlite Flash firing cannot be set F e When using the self timer see the E notes on page 106
191. ion of the image s brightness level The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right while the vertical axis indicates Dark image how many pixels exist for each brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker the image The more pixels there are toward the right the brighter the image If there are too many pixels on the left the shadow detail will be lost If there are too many pixels on the right the highlight detail will be lost The gradation in between will be reproduced By checking Bright image the image and its brightness histogram you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation RGB Display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color s brightness level in the image RGB or red green and blue The horizontal axis indicates the color s brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker and less prominent the color The more pixels there are toward the right the brighter and denser the color If there are too many pixels on the left the respective color information will be lacking If there are too many pixels on the right the color will be too saturated with no gradation By checking the image s RGB histogram you can see the color s saturation
192. ions shown on the left zy FEE amp INFO e Press the gt button to select the Return desired option then press the Enter s 9 image index button For a slide show press the Play movie remote control s T button to select Slide show an option then press the Enter button INFO Disp shooting info e f you select Return and press the Rotate Enter button the menu will disappear and you can use the button to select an image E Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection For details refer to the TV set s instruction manual e Certain TV sets even those compatible with HDMI CEC may not operate properly In such a case disconnect the HDMI cable set gt 2 Ctrl over HDMI to Disable and use the camera to control the playback operation 264 Viewing the Images on TV Viewing on Non HD TV Sets Connected with AV Cable Stereo AV Cable AVC DC400ST sold separately is required Z 1 Connect the AV cable to the ZA camera e With the plug s lt Canon gt logo facing the back of the camera insert it into the lt A V OUT gt terminal N Boley 5 JING Si Anil Connect the AV cable to the TV set e Connect the AV cable to the TV s video IN terminal and audio IN terminal 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV s video input to select the connected port A Set the camera s power switch to l
193. ired setting then press lt gt OFF AUTO ON gt The setting screen closes and the Noise reduction applied to ima menu will reappear ges exposed at 1 sec or longer SET als e Auto For 1 sec or longer exposures noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected This Auto setting is effective in most cases e Enable Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec or longer The Enable setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise cannot be detected with the Auto setting 3 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied QD e With Auto and Enable the noise reduction process after the picture is taken may take the same amount of time as the exposure You cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed e Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the Enable setting than with the Disable or Auto setting e With Auto and Enable if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed BUSY will be displayed during the noise reduction process The Live View display will not reappear until the noise reduction is completed You cannot take another picture 128 MANN Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction m Peripheral light fall off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics Color fringing
194. is recommended Contacts 17 Quick Start Guide memm 1 Insert the battery p 30 2 To charge the battery see page 28 Insert a card p 31 e With the card s label facing toward the back of the camera insert it into the card slot Attach the lens p 39 Align the lens white or red index with the camera s index in the matching color Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 39 Set the power switch to lt ONs gt and set the Mode Dial to lt j gt N Scene Intelligent Auto p 58 FF e All the necessary camera settings J will be set automatically 18 Quick Start Guide m Flip out the LCD monitor p 33 When the LCD monitor displays the time zone and date time setting screens see page 36 Focus the subject p 43 Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus the subject raised automatically Take the picture p 43 e Press the shutter button completely to take the picture 2 Review the picture p 204 e The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD monitor e To display the image again press the lt gt gt button p 84 e To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see
195. it indicates that the Live View image brightness is close to what the captured image will look like If lt H gt is blinking it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low or bright light conditions However the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting Note that noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded e If you use the lt gt or lt g gt shooting mode bulb exposure or flash the lt H gt icon and histogram will be grayed out for your reference The histogram may not be properly displayed in low or bright light conditions 148 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Scene Icons During Live View shooting in the lt 45 gt mode an icon representing the scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be adapted to that scene For certain scenes or shooting conditions the icon displayed may not match the actual scene a Blue sky included Non Portrait gy Packground Color Light blue Nature and Outdoor Scene arf wi Cage aeai o Dark blue with ipod FQ B a 1 Displayed only when the AF method is set to X Tracking If another AF method is set the Non Portrait icon will be displayed even if a person is detected 2 Displayed when the attached lens has distance information With an Extension Tube or Closeup Lens the icon displayed
196. itor is closed 33 Turning on the Power mu If you turn on the power switch and the time zone and date time setting screens appear see page 36 to set the time zone and date time lt s The camera turns on You can shoot movies p 173 lt ON gt The camera turns on You can shoot still photos lt OFF gt The camera is turned off and does not operate Set to this position when not using the camera About the Automatic Self Cleaning Sensor Whenever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt sensor cleaning will be executed automatically A small sound may be heard During the sensor cleaning the LCD monitor will display lt 0 gt e You can still shoot during sensor cleaning Press the shutter button halfway p 43 to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture e f you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt gt icon may not be displayed This is normal and not a problem um About Auto Power Off e To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after approx 30 seconds of non operation To turn on the camera again just press the shutter button halfway p 43 e You can set the auto power off time with 2 Auto power off p 205 F If you set the power switch to lt OFF gt while an image is being recorded to the card Recording will be displayed and the power will turn off after the card finishes recording the i
197. ity AE 112 AN OUT iced test e 252 265 382 B W Monochrome 96 134 Background MuSiC 261 Basic Zone modes 24 Battery coduniveeisccnemennveaass 28 30 35 Battery check ceceeeeeeeeees 35 Battery Grip eees 35 316 PEGI GF chsdeccdertticauniastnsntaddadseessens 204 Black and white image 77 96 134 Bracketing s s s 121 140 Brightness exposure a se 119 Auto exposure bracketing AEB aen anean an 121 298 Autoexposure lock AE lock 123 Exposure compensation 119 Measurement method Metering mode ceeeee 117 Built in TAS Macewnccccasiend se ucodsennunte 107 BULB Bulb exposure 116 Bulb exposures cceeeeeeeeeeeee teens 116 Creative AUtO c ccccceeee 64 Cable 3 262 265 280 316 362 Camera Camera shake n a 142 Clear camera settings 214 Holding the camera 00 42 Settings display 213 Camera shake 41 42 Card seee arean ates 17 31 48 Card reminde r cccccceceees 204 Formater oera 48 Low level format 00088 49 PRODIGIE serani hessian 32 49 SD speed ClaSS ccccceeee 173 Write protect ass creas oe teerreteeesect 31 Center weighted average metering swrrarcescncarccenystcacanreuaaats 118 Charger civautttcecaaserl a eile 26 28 Chromatic aberration correction 130 Cleaning Image sensor 223 226 Clear
198. ive in flash images where the subject has red eye When On is set the red eye will be corrected for printing Fl e The g Brightener and Red eye corr effects will not be reflected on the screen When you select Detail set you can adjust the Contrast Saturation Color tone and Color balance To adjust the Color balance use the lt lt gt gt keys B is for blue A for amber M for magenta and G for green The image s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color e f you select Clear all all the printing effect settings will be reverted to their defaults 286 6 Printing C Cropping the Image Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only lt the cropped portion as if the image was a D SET ai or ect recomposed Set the cropping right before printing If you set the cropping and then set the print settings you may have to set the cropping again before printing 1 On the print settings screen select Cropping 2 Set the cropping frame size position and aspect ratio e The image area within the cropping frame will be printed The cropping frame s aspect ratio can be changed with Paper settings Changing the cropping frame size When you press the lt amp gt or lt E Q gt button the size of the cropping frame will change The smaller the cropping frame the larger the image magnification will be for printing Moving the cropping frame Press the lt
199. k Control Image recording THE White balance quality Bei Hy Picture Style Movie recording WON at be SM Auto Lighting size Optimizer Frame rate Video snapshot Eye Fi card eaGPs transmission Movie Servo AF Wi aie imme gm ie i eo il Exposure mode AE lock Autoexposure Manual exposure LED light Magnified view Shutter speed Recording level Aperture Manual GPS connection indicator ISO speed Digital compass Attenuator Exposure level indicator Highlight tone priority Wind filter F When movie shooting starts the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time 179 Shooting Movies Notes on Movie Shooting cD e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components e f lt M gt is set you should not change the ISO speed or aperture during movie shooting because it may also change the white balance e f you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting the movie may flicker e Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended Zooming the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens maximum aperture changes or not Exposure changes may be recorded as a result You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting Be careful not to cover the microphone p 174 with your finger etc Cautions for movie s
200. lance Spot metering circle 137 WB Matching the Light Source ee 2 Select Custom White Balance a ri oof f ff Ff Expo comp AEB 2 1 1 22 Under the 82 tab select Custom Auto Lighting Optimizer hi i e a White Balance then press lt gt WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 gt The custom white balance selection oai ae screen will appear Picture Style Auto Metering mode Ge 3 Import the white balance data Select the image that was captured in step 1 then press lt 6 gt gt On the dialog screen that appears select OK and the data will be En um imported When the menu reappears press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu A Select the custom white balance e Press the lt A WB gt button Select lt x gt then press lt gt a e f the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure a correct white balance may not be obtained e An image captured while the Picture Style was set to Monochrome p 96 or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in step 3 E e Instead of a white object an 18 gray card commercially available can produce a more accurate white balance e The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility provided software p 364 will be registered under lt x8 gt If you perform step 3 the data for the registered personal white balance
201. le number 208 Handy Features eee e Auto reset The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created When you replace the card or create a folder the file numbering restarts from 0001 for the new images saved This is convenient if you want to organize images according to cards or folders However if the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001 use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder File numbering is reset e Manual reset To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder When you reset the file numbering manually a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001 This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today for example After the manual reset the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen GD If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999 shooting will not be possible even if the card still has storage capacity The LCD monitor will display a mes
202. let use only AC Adapter Kit ACK E8 rated input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz rated output 7 4 V DC Using anything else can cause fire overheating or electrical shock 352 USA and Canada only The Lithium ion polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable Please call 1 800 8 BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery For CA USA only Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for details CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION 353 MEMO 354 MEMO 355 MEMO 356 MEMO 357 MEMO 358 MEMO 359 MEMO 360 14 Downloading Images to a Personal Computer This chapter explains how to download images from the camera to your personal computer gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD ROM provided with the camera and explains how to install the software on your personal computer It also explains how to view the Software Instruction Manuals EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Software Software Instruction Manuals Downloading Images to a Personal Computer mm
203. ll appear in the viewfinder 80 Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type mx In the lt Q gt lt a gt lt W gt and lt A gt Basic Zone modes you can shoot while the settings match the lighting or scene type Normally s Default setting is adequate but if the settings match the lighting condition or scene the picture will look more accurate to your eye For Live View shooting if you set both Light scene based shots and Ambience based shots p 77 you should first set Light scene based shots This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the LCD monitor A Lighting or Scene a E versen olofofo Daylight GALA Ese ofoofo Tungsten light Set the Mode Dial to any of the following modes lt gt lt a gt lt W gt or lt gt E 2 Display the Live View image e Press the lt gt button to display the Live View image gt You can check the resulting effect on the screen 81 Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type On the Quick Control screen select the lighting or scene type Perce e Press the lt Q gt button 610 r ae E e Press the lt AV gt key to select oe Default setting Light scene is Default setting based shots will appear on the screen e Press the lt lt P gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select the desired lighting or scene type gt The resulting image with the selected lighting or scene type will be displayed Take the
204. log select OK and press lt gt 210 Handy Features Text Entry Procedure z ries Changing the entry area AMMMA MEMRAM 4 f ke Press the lt Q gt button to toggle QWERTY UI OP between the top and bottom entry jfals olFlelHlatKle areas u Z X CV_ B N M Ael Moving the cursor EWG CmICancel CHMOK Press the lt lt P gt key to move the cursor e Entering text In the bottom area press the lt lt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to select a character then press lt gt to enter it e Changing the entry mode Select Aa 1 at the bottom right of the bottom entry area Each time you press lt gt the entry mode will change as follows Lower case Numerals Symbols 1 gt Numerals Symbols 2 gt Upper case When Touch control Disable is set you can display all the available characters on one screen e Deleting a character Press the lt 1 gt button to delete one character e Exiting Press the lt MENU gt button check the text select OK then press lt 1 gt The screen in step 2 will reappear e Canceling the text entry Press the lt INFO gt button check the text select OK then press lt 1 gt The screen in step 2 will reappear Ail You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility provided software p 364 211 Handy Features W Auto Rotation of Vertical Images D O a E eee t Auto rotate bona a Ct then press l
205. lt d gt gt key to select the 0 1 3 stop Custom Function number then press 1 1 2 stop lt G gt CFn I Exposure Change the setting as desired aaa menns e Press the lt A gt key to select the Tuo setting number then press lt gt e Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to set another Custom Functions e At the bottom of the screen the current Custom Function settings are indicated below the respective function numbers Exit the setting e Press the lt MENU gt button gt The screen for step 1 will reappear Clearing All Custom Functions Under 4 Clear settings select Clear all Custom Func C Fn to clear all the Custom Function settings currently set p 214 296 M amp M Setting Custom Functions Custom Functions ca LV Movie Shooting Shooting 1 Exposure level increments O O 298 2 ISO expansion j O In M C Fn l Exposure C Fn Il Image 3 Highlight tone priority p 299 O O C Fn Ill Autofocus Drive 4 AF assist beam firing H p 300 AF Quick 5 Mirror lockup If you use an EX series Speedlite sold separately equipped with an LED light the LED light will turn on for AF assist even in the AFY AFC and AFO modes C Fn IV Operation Others 6 Shutter AE lock button p 301 O O O O 7 Assign SET button p 302 Except 3 Exeepi 2 3 8 LCD displ
206. lt in Flash To obtain a correct flash exposure the flash output will be set automatically to match the set aperture autoflash exposure The shutter speed will be set automatically between 1 200 sec 30 sec to suit the scene s brightness In low light the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically Both the subject and background look properly exposed automatic slow speed flash sync If you are handholding the camera keep it steady to prevent camera shake Using a tripod is recommended To prevent a slow shutter speed under 31 Flash controll set Flash sync speed in Av mode to 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed p 219 Depth of Field Preview The aperture opening diaphragm changes only at the moment when the picture is taken Otherwise the aperture remains fully open Therefore when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor the depth of field will look narrow Press the depth of field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of field range of acceptable focus Fl While looking at the Live View image p 146 and holding down the depth of field preview button you can change the aperture and see how the depth of field changes 114 M Manual Exposure ma You can set both the shutter soeed and aperture manually as desired
207. lters e Shoot movies gt p 173 Movie shooting Image Quality Shoot with image effects matching the subject gt p 95 Picture Style Make a large size print of the picture gt p 88 AL aL GW Take many pictures Focusing Change the point of focus gt p 88 451 d S1 S2 3 gt p 100 EJ AF point selection Shoot a moving subject Playback View the images on the camera Search for pictures quickly gt p 70 98 Al Servo AF gt p 84 Playback gt p 242 H Index display p 243 li Image browsing Rate images Prevent important images from accidental deletion gt p 248 Ratings gt p 266 Image protect Delete unnecessary images gt p 268 n Delete Auto play images and movies p 258 Slide show View the images or movies on a TV set gt p 262 Video OUT Adjust the LCD monitor brightness gt p 205 LCD monitor brightness Printing Print pictures easily gt p 279 Direct printing Index to Features mu Power e Battery e Charging e Installing Removing e Battery check Power outlet e Auto power off Card e Installing Removing e Format e Release shutter without card Lens e Attaching Detaching e Zoom e Image Stabilizer Basic Settings e Dioptric adjustment e Language e Zone Date Time e Beeper LCD Monitor e Using the LCD Monitor e LCD auto off on e Brightness adjustment e Touch
208. m Functions C Fn if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable ISO 100 and H equivalent to ISO 25600 cannot be selected p 299 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image 92 ISO Changing the ISO Speed W e When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise such as dots of light and banding may become noticeable e f you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject overexposure may result e With ISO 12800 or H equivalent to ISO 25600 the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease e As H equivalent to ISO 25600 is an expanded ISO speed setting noise such as dots of light and banding and irregular colors will be more noticeable and the resolution will be lower than usual e As the maximum ISO speed that can be set differs between still photo shooting and movie shooting manual exposure the ISO speed you set may change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting The maximum ISO speed settable varies depending on the setting for 2 ISO expansion under fY 4 Custom Functions C Fn e When 0 Off is set If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting ISO speed will be changed to ISO 6400 e When 1 On is set If you
209. mage 34 Turning on the Power nnn SSS wa Checking the Battery Level When the power is turned on the battery level will be indicated in one of four levels CO aL 514 Battery level is sufficient E Battery level is low but the camera can still be used EZZ aa al Battery will be exhausted soon Blinks s Recharge the battery Battery Life Approx number of shots At 23 C 73 F At 0 32 F No Flash 50 Flash Use e The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 no Live View shooting and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards e Possible shots with Battery Grip BG E8 e With two LP E8 batteries approx twice as many shots as with the camera alone e With size AA LR6 alkaline batteries at 23 C 73 F approx 470 shots with no flash approx 270 shots with 50 flash use E e The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often e The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions e The lens operation is powered by the camera s battery Depending on the lens used the number of possible shots may be lower e For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting see page 147 35
210. mage type the print order may not be possible Al images and movies cannot be print ordered You can print images through direct printing p 292 290 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF Print Ordering Sel lmage Print order LJ Standard A Index T prints 4 images Date Off File No off Sel lmage Eyi All image Set up MENU Em 5 22078 Quantity Total images selected Checkmark Index icon e Byi Select and order images one by one To display the three image display press the lt 1 Q gt button To return to the single image display press the lt gt button Press the lt MENU gt button to save the print order to the card Standard Both Press the lt AV gt key to set the number of copies to be printed for the displayed image Index Press lt 61 gt to add a checkmark to the box lt V gt The image will be included in the index print Select Mark all in folder and select the folder A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed If you select Clear all in folder and select the folder the print order for that folder will all be canceled e All image If you select Mark all on card one copy of all the images on the card will be set for printing If you select Clear all on card the print order will be cleared for all the images on the card 4 e Note that images and movies will not be included in the print order even if you set
211. mm diameter is connected to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 20 it will be given priority Wind filter Attenuator Level meter Sound rec Rec level options Auto The sound recording level is adjusted automatically Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level Manual For advanced users You can adjust the sound recording level to one of 64 levels Select Rec level and look at the level meter while pressing the lt lt P gt key to adjust the sound recording level While looking at the peak hold indicator approx 3 sec adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up the 12 12 dB mark on the right for the loudest sounds If it exceeds 0 the sound will be distorted Disable Sound will not be recorded 198 tE Movie Menu Function Settings a Wind filter When set to Enable it reduces wind noise when there is wind outdoors This feature takes effect only with the built in microphone Note that Enable will also reduce low bass sounds so set this function to Disable when there is no wind It will record a more natural sound than with Enable Attenuator Even if you set Sound recording to Auto or Manual and shoot sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound In such a case setting it to Enable is recommended E e In Basic Zone modes the settings available for Sound recording will be On Off
212. mpose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture This is called focus lock Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes except lt gt Shooting a Moving Subject In the lt G gt mode if the subject moves distance to camera changes while or after you focus Al Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject continuously The beeper will continue beeping softly As long as you keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway the focusing will be continuous When you want to take the picture press the shutter button completely 61 F Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor This is called Live View shooting For details see page 145 a 2 ay k A Soy Nt SSP 1 Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor 2 Focus the subject ae e Press the shutter button halfway to focus gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound 3 Take the picture e Press the shutter button completely gt The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor gt After the image review ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically Press the lt gt but
213. n SD Speed Class 6 CLASS amp or faster card To find out the card s read write speed refer to the card manufacturer s Web site etc e Ifthe movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically 330 Troubleshooting Guide The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting In shooting modes other than lt M gt the ISO speed is set automatically In the lt M gt mode you can freely set the ISO speed p 178 The exposure changes during movie shooting e If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting the changes in the exposure may be recorded Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens maximum aperture changes or not Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result The subject looks distorted during movie shooting e f you move the camera to the left or right quickly high speed panning or shoot a moving subject the image may look distorted The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting e Flickering horizontal stripes noise or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light LED bulbs or other light sources during movie shooting Also changes in the exposure brightness or color tone may also be recorded In the lt M gt mode a slow shutter speed may solve the problem 331 Troubleshooting Guide Operation Problems During touch scre
214. nd shoot again e Also shoot in another shooting mode Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots shooting also with lt 43 gt and lt F gt is recommended F e Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires e f you use the self timer together with flash the self timer lamp will light up briefly after the picture is taken See the caution on page 75 72 Shooting Night Scenes Handheld mau Normally a tripod is necessary to steady your camera when shooting a night scene However with the lt gt Handheld Night Scene mode you can shoot night scenes while handholding the camera Four shots are taken continuously for each picture and the resulting image with reduced camera shake is recorded ales Handheld Might Scene For shooting night scenes without a tripod Takes 4 consecutive shots E Handheld Might Scene Combine 4 shots to create a stable image Standard setting oO a SE ex aL 514 vy zQ Shooting Tips Hold the camera firmly While shooting hold the camera firmly and steadily In this mode four shots are aligned and merged into a single image However if there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to camera shake they may not align properly in the final image e For shots of people turn on the flash If you want to include people in a night scene shot press the lt Q gt button to set lt 4 gt Flash on To take a nice portrait th
215. ndacouesip it useeawmdeadvadeaa vaaaads 218 Automatic Sensor Cleaning cccccccsscccssceseccsseessessseeeseeens 223 Appending Dust Delete Data cee cee cee ceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeees 224 Manual Sensor Cleaning cscssccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneaes 226 Contents 8 Wireless Flash Photography 229 Using Wireless PASM viccesiciecindorcatwisdhunctanniochdorctiedandiuleaelewniladatanes 230 Easy Wireless Flash Shooting ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 231 Custom Wireless Flash Shooting eseseseeseneceeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 Other SOTUINGS ees ks loiter tates a ass E 238 9 Image Playback 241 fai Searching for Images QUICKIY cccceeecseesteeeseeeeteeesees 242 Ri Se Magnified VieWasirisics meee ead ee ee ees 244 Playing Back with the Touch Screen 245 w Rotating the IMAG eis eared erated eaordecinetow sit wea caval oce users 247 Sening Ratings soa sates leo aovten ucts curwacractianenss Raw AE 248 Q Quick Control During Playback cccccccscsccecessecseceseeeteeees 250 PER Enjoying Movies ccccccccsssecsssesssessesesscecseresseeessreessseeanes 252 We Playin MOVIES osare cue hceslaa tation ees Adorn A 254 X Editing a Movie s First and Last Scenes ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 SlideShow Auto Playback ox ccs cc sss cdeesdeveseeizenczeseayieea veh oeaecaeent ahs 258 Viewing the Images ON TV ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
216. ness momentarily Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting e lf there is a very bright light source in the picture the bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor However the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area In low light if you set the 2 LCD brightness to a bright setting chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image However the chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image When you magnify the image the image sharpness may look more pronounced than in the actual image Custom Functions e During Live View shooting certain Custom Function settings will not take effect p 297 Lens and Flash e The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when using a Super telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed since the second half of 2011 e FE lock is not possible when the built in flash or an external Speedlite is used Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite 172 Shooting Movies You can shoot movies by setting the power switch to lt gt The movie recording format will be MOV 4b Cards that can record movies When shooting movies use a large capacity SD card rated SD Speed Class 6 cLass or higher If you use a slow writing card when shooting movies the movie may not be recorded properly Also if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed the movie may not
217. ng Auto Manual Disable Sound recording Recording level Wind filter Attenuator Disable Enable Video snapshot Enable Disable Video snapshot Album settings Create a new album Add to 187 existing album In Basic Zone modes Sound recording will be set to On Off 323 Troubleshooting Guide mx If a problem occurs with the camera first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center Power Related Problems The battery pack does not recharge Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP E8 The battery charger s lamp blinks If there is a problem with the battery charger the protective circuit will stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange If this happens disconnect the charger s power plug from the power outlet and remove the battery pack Attach the battery pack to the charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a power outlet again The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to lt ON gt Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera p 30 Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed p 30 Make sure the card slot cover is closed p 31 Recharge the battery p 28 Press the lt INFO gt button p 50 The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to
218. ng range s maximum will be H equivalent to ISO 12800 Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting e Exposure compensation cannot be set e Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded f you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded Fl e When ISO Auto is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed e After recomposing the picture you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 179 compared to when you pressed the lt gt button e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display the histogram e When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subject s movement will look 178 Shooting Movies Lea Information Display e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change AF method e AFLez E Tracking e AFC FlexiZone Multi Movie shooting mode e AFO FlexiZone Single A Autoexposure Basic Zone modes Possible shots a Autoexposure Movie shooting remaining time Creative Zone modes Elapsed time aM Manual exposure Battery check AF point FlexiZone Single Drive mode Leaf L027 rn mM Quic
219. nings Follow the warnings below Otherwise death or serious injuries may result e To prevent fire excessive heat chemical leakage explosions and electrical shock follow the safeguards below Do not use any batteries power sources or accessories not specified in the Instruction Manual Do not use any home made or modified batteries Do not short circuit disassemble or modify the battery Do not apply heat or solder to the battery Do not expose the battery to fire or water Do not subject the battery to strong physical shock Do not insert the battery s plus and minus ends incorrectly Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient temperature range Also do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the Instruction Manual Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera accessories connecting cables etc e When disposing of a battery insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries This is to prevent a fire or an explosion e f excessive heat smoke or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging Otherwise it may cause a fire heat damage or electrical shock e f the battery leaks changes color deforms or emits smoke or fumes remove it immediately Be careful not to get burned in the process It may cause a
220. not appear or the level if displayed will hardly go upward First shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough e If there is a very bright light source in the picture the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor In movies the bright areas will be recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor Indicator Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting e Regarding the image quality of still photos see Image Quality on page 171 TV Connection e If you connect the camera to a TV set p 262 265 and shoot a movie the TV will not output any sound during the shooting However the sound will be properly recorded 201 QD Cautions when Movie servo AF is set to Enable Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult e A fast moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera e A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera e Also refer to Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult on page 165 e Since using Movie Servo AF will consume battery power the number of possible shots and the possible movie shooting time will be reduced e During zooming or image magnification Movie Servo AF operation will be stopped momentarily e During movie shooting if a subject approaches moves away or if the camera is moved vertically or horizontally panning the recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contract change in image magnification
221. ns and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 133 1 x 99 8 x 78 8 mm 5 2 x 3 9 x 3 1 in Weight Approx 580 g 20 5 oz CIPA Guidelines Approx 525 g 18 5 oz Body only 343 Specifications e Operation Environment Working temperature range 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Working humidity 85 or less e Battery Pack LP E8 Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated voltage 7 2 V DC Battery capacity 1120 mAh Working temperature range During charging 6 C 40 C 43 F 104 F During shooting 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Working humidity 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 37 1 x 15 4 x 55 2 mm 1 5 x 0 6 x 2 2 in Weight Approx 52 g 1 8 oz e Battery Charger LC E8 Compatible battery Battery Pack LP E8 Recharging time Approx 2 hours at 23 C 73 F Rated input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Rated output 8 4 V DC 720 mA Working temperature range 6 C 40 C 43 F 104 F Working humidity 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 69 x 28 x 87 5 mm 2 7 x 1 1 x 3 4 in Weight Approx 82 g 2 9 oz e Battery Charger LC E8E Compatible battery Battery Pack LP E8 Recharging time Approx 2 hours at 23 C 73 F Rated input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Rated output 8 4 V DC 720 mA Working temperature range 6 C 40 C 43 F 104 F Working humidity 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 69 x 28 x 87 5 mm 2 7 x 1 1 x 3 4 in Weight Approx 82 g 2 9 oz
222. nsation if the flash exposure of the subject does not come out as desired You can set the exposure compensation up to 2 stops in 1 3 stop increments 5 GA 1 Press the lt Q gt button 610 EQ The Quick Control screen will appear p 44 q 3 2 1 9 1 L 3 Peay 2 Select 62 Siw ae Sere e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select amp 4 eS gt Flash exposure comp will be displayed at the bottom ONESHOT m aL 32 1 9 143 Y 3 Set the exposure compensation amount eS To make the flash exposure brighter mes amp turn the lt lt gt dial to the right onesHor C 2 a increased exposure To make it darker turn the lt gt dial to the left decreased exposure I 0 Dae Veett2 150 LOU 5 x i W St II gt When you press the shutter button halfway the lt amp 4 gt icon will appear in the viewfinder e After taking the picture cancel the flash exposure compensation by setting it back to 0 H lf 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 125 is set to any setting other than Disable the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation is set Fl You can also set flash exposure compensation with Built in flash settings in 6 1 Flash control p 220 120 13 Auto Exposure Bracketing mm This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the exposure automatically up to
223. nstruction Manual p 367 261 Viewing the Images on TV mus You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set Viewing on High Definition HD TV Sets Connected with HDMI HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately is required Connect the HDMI cable to the camera e With the plug s lt a HDMI MINI gt logo facing the front of the camera insert it into the lt HDMI OUT gt terminal wa 2 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV D set Connect the HDMI cable to the TV s HDMI IN port 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV s video input to select the connected port A Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt QW e Adjust the movie s sound volume with the TV set The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera e Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television turn off the camera and TV set e Depending on the TV set part of the image displayed may be cut off 262 Viewing the Images on TV 5 Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear on the TV screen Nothing will be displayed on the camera s LCD monitor e The images will automatically be displayed at the TV s optimum resolution e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the display format e To play back movies see page 254 4D The images cannot be output at the same time from both the lt HDMI OUT gt and lt A V OUT gt
224. nstruction manual When you change the printing effects changes are reflected in the image displayed on the upper left Note that the printed image may look slightly different from the displayed image which is only an approximation This also applies to Brightness and Adjust levels on page 286 284 Printing eee Info to print with images Set the date and file number off imprinting Date Set them if necessary e Select lt gt then press lt gt Derault e Set as desired then press lt gt File No 6 Set the number of copies Set it if necessary e Select lt gt then press lt gt Set the number of copies then press lt G1 gt gee 0n Start printing a a E70 7 1 copies Both Select Print then press lt 7 gt Ly 1 copies Cropping 4 9x13 m Paper settings F Photo Cancel E Borderless Print E e With Easy printing you can print another image using the same settings Just select the image and press the lt D gt button With Easy printing the number of copies will always be 1 You cannot set the number of copies Also any cropping p 287 will not be applied e The Default setting for printing effects and other options are the printers own default settings as set by the printer s manufacturer Refer to the printer s instruction manual to find out what the Default settings are e Depending on the image s file size and image recording qualit
225. nts will detect only vertical or horizontal lines no cross type focusing With maximum apertures up to f 2 8 High precision AF with vertical and horizontal lines detection is possible with the center AF point in addition to the cross type focusing vertical and horizontal lines detected simultaneously The remaining eight AF points enable cross type focusing in the same way as when using lenses with maximum apertures up to 5 6 Except with the EF28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM and EF50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro El If you use an Extender sold separately and the maximum aperture becomes smaller than f 5 6 AF shooting will not be possible except in Tracking FlexiZone Multi and FlexiZone Single during Live View shooting For details refer to the Extender s instruction manual Lenses not Enabling Cross Type Focusing with all AF Points The following lenses enable only horizontal line sensitive focusing with the three AF points on the left and the three AF points on the right and only vertical line sensitive focusing with the top and bottom AF points Cross type focusing is possible only with the center AF point EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 II EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 III EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 USM EF35 105mm f 4 5 5 6 EF35 105mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 II EF80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM 102 Subjects Difficult to FOCUS mE Autofocus can fail to achieve focus viewfinder s focus confirmation light lt gt blinks
226. o approx 4 hours 28 Charging the Battery eee vy zQ Tips for Using the Battery and Charger e Upon purchase the battery is not fully charged Recharge the battery before using e Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used Even during storage a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its Capacity e After recharging the battery detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet e When not using the camera remove the battery If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period a small amount of power current is released resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life Store the battery with the protective cover provided attached Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery s performance e The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz power source If necessary attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or region Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger Doing so can damage the battery charger e If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged the battery has reached the end of its service life Purchase a new battery 4D e After disconnecting the charger s power plug do not touch the prongs for at least 3 sec e Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pa
227. o save battery power setting the IS switch to lt OFF gt is recommended e The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the shooting conditions However the following lenses switch the IS mode automatically e EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM e EF S18 55mm 3 5 5 6 IS Il e EF S18 200mm f 3 5 5 6 IS e EF S15 85mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM 41 Basic Operation mE Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob e Turn the knob left or right until the nine AF points in the viewfinder look sharp Fl If the camera s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image using E series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses 10 types sold separately is recommended Holding the Camera To obtain sharp images hold the camera still to minimize camera shake Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1 Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly 2 Hold the lens bottom with your left hand 3 Rest your hand s right index finger lightly on the shutter button 4 Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body 5 To maintain a stable stance place one foot slightly ahead of the other 6 Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder in To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see page 145 42 Basic Operation
228. oise Reduction or a Creative filter is set a Shooting 2 Red 1 3 stop or 1 2 stop increments 5 stops AEB 424 compensation AEB 2 stops Disable Low Standard High pe Optimizer Disable during manual exposure White balance shift WB correction White balance correction bracketing BKT setting White balance bracketing EA Auto EZS Standard P Portrait Picture Style ez Landscape EN Neutral 2 55 Faithful 22M Monochrome B21 User Def 1 3 Evaluative metering amp Partial metering Metering mode CJ Spot metering CJ Center weighted average metering Fl Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes 318 M4 Menu Settings G Shooting 3 Red Page Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 224 Max 400 Max 800 Max 1600 94 Max 3200 Max 6400 Disable Auto Enable 127 reduction High ISO speed noise Disable Low Standard High 126 reduction Multi Shot Noise Reduction Live View Shooting Red Live View shooting Enable Disable X Tracking FlexiZone Multi ARMERO FlexiZone Single Quick mode Hee Aspect ratio 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 5 4 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min Metering timer 30 min gt Playback 1 Blue Select images All images in folder Unprotect Protect images all images in folder All images on card Unprotect all images on card Rotate image Rotate vertical im
229. olor saturation can be adjusted To decrease the color saturation set it toward the minus end The closer it is to HJ the more diluted the colors will look To increase the color saturation set it toward the plus end The closer it is to J the bolder the colors will look Color tone The skin tones can be adjusted To make the skin tone redder set it toward the minus end The closer it is to M the redder the skin tone will look To make the skin tone less red set it toward the plus end The closer itis to EJ the more yellow the skin tone will look 133 31 Customizing Image Characteristics Se Monochrome Adjustment For Monochrome you can also set Filter effect and Toning effect in addition to Sharpness and Contrast explained on the preceding page Filter Effect Detail set GM Monochrome With a filter effect applied to a 9N None monochrome image you can make pete Ye Yellow white clouds or green trees stand out Filter effect Or Orange R Red more G Green _ Sample Effects Normal black and white image with no filter effects The blue sky will look more natural and the white clouds will look Ye Yellow i crisper Or Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker The sunset will look more brilliant l The blue sky will look quite dark Fall leaves will look crisper and R Red i brighter Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter
230. omenclature Lens Lens without a distance scale Focusing ring p 103 170 Focus mode switch p 39 Zoom position index p 40 Filter thread front of lens p 344 Zoom ring p 40 Image Stabilizer switch p 41 Contacts p 17 Lens mount index p 39 Lens with a distance scale Hood mount p 344 Focus mode switch p 39 Zoom position index p 40 Distance scale Filter thread front of lens p 344 gt S SS Zoom ring p 40 Focusing ring p 103 170 Contacts p 17 Image Stabilizer switch p 41 Lens mount index p 39 25 Nomenclature Battery Charger LC E8 Charger for Battery Pack LP E8 p 28 Power plug Battery pack slot Charge lamp ig Full charge lamp Canon B ATTERY CH ARGER IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U S A use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed Battery Charger LC E8E Charger for Battery Pack LP E8 p 28 Battery pack slot Charge lamp Full charge lamp 1 hy S xk gt Mey lt Power cord socket 2 Power cord 26 Getting Started This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations Attaching
231. omes smoother 4D e With setting 1 the Auto Lighting Optimizer p 125 is automatically set to Disable and the setting cannot be changed e With setting 1 noise grainy image banding etc may become slightly more pronounced than with setting 0 El With setting 1 the settable range will be ISO 200 ISO 12800 up to ISO 6400 for movies Also the lt D gt icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled 299 mM Custom Function Settings SSS eee C Fn Ill Autofocus Drive C Fn 4 AF assist beam firing The settings to specify whether or not the AF assist beam is emitted by the camera s built in flash or by an external EOS dedicated Speedlite can be set 0 Fl Enable If necessary the AF assist beam will be emitted by the built in flash or external Speedlite Disable The AF assist beam is not emitted Enable external flash only If an external Speedlite is attached it will emit the AF assist beam when necessary The camera s built in flash will not fire the AF assist beam IR AF assist beam only Among external Speedlites only those which have an infrared AF assist beam will be able to emit the beam This prevents any Speedlite which uses a series of intermittent flashes like the built in flash from firing the AF assist beam With an EX series Speedlite equipped with an LED light the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF as
232. on Eye Fi settings A Display the connection CS information Connection info e Select Connection info then press lt G gt 311 Using Eye Fi Cards Connection info 5 Check the Access point SSID Access point SSID Check that an access point is ABCDEFG1234567890 SERGIO Connanting displayed for Access point SSID MAC address 00 12 5a 07 4b 9c e You can also check the Eye Fi card s Eye Fi firmware Ver i i E E aa oe A MAC address and firmware version as Press the lt MENU gt button three times to exit the menu 6 Take the picture gt The picture is transferred and the oo a al EOD lt gt icon switches from gray not connected to one of the icons below e For transferred images is displayed in the shooting information display p 270 Transmission status icon Ir e Gray Not connected No connection with access point Blinking Connecting Connection with access point Displayed Connected Connection to access point established 1 Transferring Image transfer to access point in progress 312 Using Eye Fi Cards eee Ww Cautions for Using Eye Fi Cards e If is displayed an error occurred while retrieving the card information Turn the camera s power switch off and on again e Even if Eye Fi trans is set to Disable it may still transmit a signal In hospitals airports and other places where wireless transmission
233. on the top of the screen is what will remain 3 Check the edited movie f e Select gt and press lt 6 gt to play back the portion highlighted in blue To change the editing go back to step 2 e To cancel the editing press the lt MENU gt button select OK on the confirmation screen then press lt gt 256 X Editing a Movie s First and Last Scenes A Save the edited movie e Select 2 then press lt gt gt The save screen will appear e To save it as anew movie select New file To save it and overwrite the original movie file select Overwrite Then press lt 7 gt e On the confirmation screen select OK then press lt gt to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen wD Since the editing is performed in approx 1 sec increments position indicated by the exact position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified e Ifthe card does not have enough free space New file will not be available e When the battery level is low editing the movie is not possible Use a fully charged battery 25 mam Slide Show Auto Playback ma You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show 1 Select Slide show e Under the 12 tab select Slide show then press lt gt O 0O O O El El E gt E gt amp Histogram disp Brightness Image jump wi Slide show Rating Ctrl over HDM
234. ontrol Setting functions during Live View shooting Setting functions during movie shooting Playback operations swipe tN Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations lf 1 Beep is set to Touch to 4 the beep will not sound during touch Enable operations iTouch to 2 Disable 54 Touch Screen Operations tM Touch Control Settings dande gi Select Touch control Screen color l e Under the f3 tab select Touch Feature guide Sern See control then press lt gt Sensor cleaning GPS device settings Set the Touch control Select Enable a Setting it to Disable will disable _Disable touch operations Ww Cautions for Touch Screen Operations Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive do not use any sharp objects such as your fingernail ballpoint pens etc for touch operations e Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations e Ifthe LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet the touch screen may not respond or misoperation may occur In such a case turn off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth e Do not attach any protective sheet commercially available or sticker on the LCD monitor It may make the touch operation response slow 55 Basic Shooting and Image Playback This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back images With Basic Zone modes all you do is point and
235. oom lens use the wide angle end When using the wide angle end of a zoom lens objects near and far will be in focus better than at the telephoto end It also adds breadth to landscapes e Shooting night scenes Since the built in flash will be disabled this mode lt A gt is also good for night scenes When shooting night scenes use a tripod to prevent camera shake QD The built in flash will not fire even in backlit or low light conditions 68 Shooting Close ups mx When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close use the lt gt Close up mode To make small things appear much larger use a macro lens sold separately K Close up mp 4 Standard setting EL Derauit setting o Se am aL 514 yy zq Shooting Tips e Use a simple background A simple background makes the flower etc stand out better Move as close as possible to the subject Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance Some lenses have indications such as lt 0 25m 0 8ft gt The lens minimum focusing distance is measured from the lt gt focal plane mark on the top of the camera to the subject If you are too close to the subject the focus confirmation light lt gt will blink Under low light the built in flash will fire If you are too close to the subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark move away from the subject e With a zoom lens use the telephoto end If you have a zoom lens using t
236. ooting and Image Playback Creative Shooting Advanced Shooting Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting Shooting Movies Handy Features Wireless Flash Photography Image Playback Post Processing Images Printing Images Customizing the Camera Reference Downloading Images to a Personal Computer Quick Reference Guide and Index E 27 57 25 fj 109 B 145 173 B 203 B 229 J 241 B 273 B 29 B 205 B 305 fj 361 fj 369 E 5 f oS ee z gt i j i ps N eal w i me 2 3 Bo gs ms a r Fe 3 je A a r F k a is 5 I E A z wie Py Contents at a Glance Shooting e Shoot automatically gt p 57 75 Basic Zone modes e Shoot continuously gt p 104 i Continuous shooting e Take a picture of yourself ina group gt p 106 amp Self timer e Freeze the action gt p 110 Tv Shutter priority AE e Blur the action e Blur the background gt p 64 Creative Auto e Keep the background in sharp focus gt p 112 Av Aperture priority AE e Adjust the image brightness exposure gt p 119 Exposure compensation e Shoot in low light gt p 58 107 4 Flash photography p 92 ISO speed setting e Shoot without flash gt p 63 Flash Off p 76 Flash Off e Photograph fireworks at night gt p 116 Bulb exposure Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor gt p 145 Live View shooting e Using Creative Filters gt p 152 Creative fi
237. or data e Acard related error is displayed p 337 About Low level Formatting e Perform low level formatting if the card s recording or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card Since low level formatting will format all recordable sectors in the card the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting e You can stop the low level formatting by selecting Cancel Even in this case normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as usual 4 When the card is formatted or data is erased only the file management information is changed The actual data is not completely erased Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card When discarding the card execute low level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the personal data from being leaked e Before using a new Eye Fi card the software in the card must be installed in your computer Then format the card with the camera F e The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card e This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft 49 Switching the LCD Monitor Display mx The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen menu screen captured images etc Shooting Settings AT Scene Intelligent Auto AF brightness flash color tone are set according to scene LJ z au 514 Menu
238. orrection Highlight tone priority Auto Standard Portrait Landscape Neutral Faithful Monochrome User Def 1 3 Ambience based shots Light scene based shots Auto Preset Daylight Shade Cloudy Tungsten light White fluorescent light Flash Custom White balance correction and white balance bracketing features provided Flash color temperature information transmission enabled Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots Auto Lighting Optimizer Provided Lens aberration correction Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction 338 Specifications e Viewfinder Type Eye level pentamirror Coverage Vertical Horizontal approx 95 with Eye point approx 19 mm Magnification Approx 0 85x 1 m with 50mm lens at infinity Eye point Approx 19 mm from eyepiece lens center at 1 m Built in dioptric adjustment Approx 3 0 1 0 m dpt Focusing screen Fixed Precision Matte Mirror Quick return type Depth of field preview Provided e Autofocus Type TTL secondary image registration phase detection AF points Nine cross type AF points Cross type AF sensitive to f 2 8 with center AF point Focusing brightness range EV 0 5 18 center AF point at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 AF operation One Shot AF Al Servo AF Al Focus AF AF assist beam Small series of flashes fired by built in flash e Exposure Control Metering modes 63 zone TTL full aperture metering e Evalua
239. ot If it is still difficult to focus set the lens focus mode switch to MF and focus manually Cautions for lt gt Handheld Night Scene e When shooting flash photography if the subject is too close to the camera the picture may come out extremely bright overexposure e f you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights the shots may not align correctly This can result in a blurry photo e f you use flash and the human subject is close to the background which is also illuminated by the flash the shots may not align correctly This can result in a blurry photo Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also appear Shooting with an external Speedlite e When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting the zoom position will be fixed to the wide end regardless of the lens zoom position e When using a Speedlite with manual flash coverage switch shoot with the flash head retracted to the wide normal position Cautions for lt amp gt HDR Backlight Control e Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise e HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit scenes or extremely high contrast scenes Cautions for lt F gt Handheld Night Scene and lt gs gt HDR Backlight Control e Compared with other shooting modes the shooting area will be smaller e WW 4L or cannot be selected Even if M AL or has be
240. other functions p 314 87 mam Setting the Image Recording Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality Ten image recording quality settings are provided ML ML AM aM 4S1 S1 S2 S3 Q 4L GM ae yl ge a gon 1 Select Image quality image quality mi e Under the 31 tab select Image Beep Enable Release shutter without cand ON quality then presos gt Image review 2 sec gt Image quality will appear Pixels recorded pixel count 2 Select the image recording Possible shots quality inane aaa e The respective quality s pixel count au raw steaccese 5141 and number of possible shots will be IL au 4M aM 4s dsi displayed to help you select the So desired quality Then press lt gt 88 tE Setting the Image Recording Quality ane See Guide to Image recording Quality Settings Approx maoun Pimeonae wes Sho Bur AL High Approx 17 9 6 4 1140 22 30 AL quality 18M 3 2 2240 2240 2240 AM Medium Approx 8 0 3 4 2150 410 2150 aM quality 8M 1 7 4200 4200 4200 ASi JPEG Approx 4 5 2 2 3350 3350 3350 aS 4 5M 1 1 6360 6360 6360 S2 a a 1 3 5570 5570 5570 S3 Eeo 0 3 21560 21560 21560 a High Approx 17 9 23 5 6 4 230 3 3 quality 18M 23 5 290 6 6 Figures for the file size number of possible shots and maximum burst are based on Canon s 8 GB t
241. oting mx Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built in Flash This section describes fully automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedlite and the built in flash You can change the flash ratio between the external Speedlite and built in flash to adjust how the shadows look on the subject On the menu screens the lt 7 gt and lt a gt icons refer to the external Speedlite and the lt amp gt and lt gt icons refer to the built in flash Built in flash settings 1 Select CustWireless Built in flash CustWireless e Follow step 5 on page 232 to select Set oe Sees CustWireless then press lt gt Wireless func Built in flash settings 2 Select Wireless func Built in flash CustWireless e Under Wireless func select Flash mode E TTL l m then press lt gt Wireless func ia He Channel 1 Built In flash settings Set the desired flash ratio and Flash mode E TTLII take the picture Wireless func Select a amp and set the flash ratio Sete ore SHOES within 8 1 to 1 1 Setting a flash ratio a H g nje to the right of 1 1 is not possible mms Ifthe built in flash output is not enough set a higher ISO speed p 92 Fl The 8 1 to 1 1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3 1 to 1 1 stops 1 2 stop increments 234 Custom Wireless Flash Shooting OD SO Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites Multiple Speedlit
242. ou can check the depth of field by pressing the depth of field preview button e During continuous shooting the exposure set for the first shot will also be applied to subsequent shots e You can also tap the subject on the LCD monitor to focus p 159 167 and shoot p 168 You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 307 for Live View shooting 146 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor ee Enabling Live View Shooting Set Live View shoot to Enable eee ee Ooms Live View shoot Enable Disable Battery Life with Live View Shooting Approx number of shots Shooting Conditions No Flash 50 Flash Use Temperature NOC TSF E e The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E8 continuous Live View shooting is possible as for approx 1 hr 30 min at 23 C 73 F Q e Inthe lt F gt and lt gt shooting modes the picture area will be smaller than with other shooting modes e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components e Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 171 172 ir e When flash is used there will be two shutter sounds but only one shot will be taken Also the time it takes to take t
243. p touch and let P AUTO go the LCD monitor KLEE E E e By tapping you can select menus AWE ih icons etc displayed on the LCD ONESHOoT O G L monitor Icons that you can tap are displayed in a frame excluding the menu screen For example when you tap Q the ED AUTO Quick Control screen appears By tapping you can return to the 3 222 042 9 1 2 23 Bai E preceding screen EA AWE P i ONESHOT O rill EJ Exposure comp AEB setting a Operations possible by tapping the screen Setting menu functions after pressing the lt MENU gt button Quick Control Setting functions after pressing the lt ISO gt lt EE gt lt A WB gt lt V 32 gt lt lt G i gt or lt gt AF gt button Setting functions during Live View shooting Setting functions during movie shooting e Playback operations 53 Touch Screen Operations Drag Menu screen Sample display i mE Slide your finger while touching the Mr T iL LCD monitor nable Re utter t card ON Image review 2 sec Lens aberration correction Red eye reduc Disable Scale display Sample display Flash exposure comp Ha Darker a Brighter i cidqiiad Tod b ITI I When using externa its flash exposure co overrides camera s lt Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the lt MENU gt button Setting a scale c
244. p 375 Using the Built in Flash p 375 Creative Zone Modes p 376 P Program AE p 376 Tv Shutter priority AE p 376 Av Aperture priority AE p 376 AF AF Operation p 377 AF Point p 377 ISO ISO Speed p 378 Drive Mode p 378 Cs Live View Shooting p 379 Shooting Movies p 380 Image Playback p 381 Quick Reference Guide Menu Operations lt MENU gt _ LA Te button al LCD monitor al Touch a screen 1 Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu 2 Press the lt lt gt key to select a tab then press the lt AV gt key to select the desired item 3 Press lt Ge gt to display the setting 4 After setting the item press lt G1 gt S D Cross keys lt G gt button lt lt gt gt Basic Zone Modes Movie Shooting L D Oo as coos ps F F image quality iL 1N AF method Beep Erate W Movie Serve AF Enable Amare shutter without card On AF wi uter bution during OH image review 2 8c Grid daplay of Leni aberration conection Red eye reduc Disab Metering timer 16 Se Creative Zone e Modes Image quality aL Beep Enable ee Releas
245. pecified image press lt gt again e To return to the menu press the lt MENU gt button 293 lal Specifying Images for a Photobook Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can specify all the images in a folder or card at one time E Photobook Set up When gt 1 Photobook Set up is set No of images 0 to All images in folder or All images Select images on card all the images in the folder or All images in folder i igi Ciear all in folder on the card will be specified All images on card To cancel the image specification select seine Clear all in folder or Clear all on card QD Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera for another photobook with this camera The photobook settings may be overwritten F images and movies cannot be specified 294 12 Customizing the Camera You can customize various camera functions to suit your picture taking preferences with Custom Functions Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative Zone modes 13 Setting Custom Functions sm jocondy g ome Select Custom Functions C Fn Certification Logo Display Under the 4 tab select Custom Custom Functions C Fn TE E ra Functions C Fn then press lt 6 gt Clear settings firmware ver 1 0 0 Custom Function number 2 Select the Custom Function number CFn I Exposure Bil Exposure level increments e Press the
246. personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera However video snapshot albums edited with EOS Video Snapshot Task p 195 can be played on the camera 202 Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer p 365 The movie files recorded on the card can be transferred to a personal computer and played with ImageBrowser EX provided software ooo T of 000l o e To have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer use a high performance personal computer Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ImageBrowser EX refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser EX User Guide e f you want to use commercially available software to play back or edit the movies make sure it is compatible with MOV files For details on commercially available software contact the software manufacturer 293 gt Playing Movies mx 1 Play back the image e Press the lt gt gt button to display images 2 Select a movie e Press the lt lt gt key to select a movie On the single image display the lt Gag 8 gt icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie If the movie is a video snapshot lt gm gt will be displayed e You can press the lt INFO gt button to switch to the shooting information display p 271 Inthe index display perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie AS movies cannot be played on the inde
247. picture Press the shutter button completely to take the picture e To shoot through the viewfinder first press the lt gt button to exit Live View shooting Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture f you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to lt OFF gt the setting will revert back to Default setting D e f you use flash the setting will switch to s Default setting However the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set e f you want to set this together with Ambience based shots set the Light scene based shots that best matches the ambience you have set In the case of Sunset for example warm colors will become prominent so the ambience you set may not work well Fl If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting functions press the lt Q gt button after step 1 Then you can set Light scene based shots on the Quick Control screen 82 Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type ee SS Lighting or Scene Type Settings Default setting Default setting suited for most subjects Daylight For subjects under sunlight Gives more natural looking blue skies and greenery and reproduces light colored flowers better Shade For subjects in the shade Suitable for skin tones which may look too bluish and for light colored flowers 2 Cloudy For subjects under overcast skies Makes skin tones and landscapes whi
248. play back properly To check the card s read write speed refer to the card manufacturer s Web site Fi About Full HD 1080 Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels scanning PLE 1080 lines Shooting Movies mE Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the movies shot p 262 265 Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is not set to lt M gt autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene s current brightness 1 Set the power switch to lt gt o gt The reflex mirror will make a sound then the image will appear on the LCD monitor s WN SG YA lt gt x m 2 Set the shooting mode Set the Mode Dial to any shooting mode except lt M gt 3 Focus the subject e Before shooting a movie focus with AF or manual focus p 159 167 170 e By default Movie Servo AF Enable is set so that the camera will always focus To stop Movie Servo AF see page 196 Shoot the movie Press the lt gt button to start shooting a movie To stop movie shooting press lt gt again gt While the movie is being shot the mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen Microphone 174 Shooting Movies WwW e Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 200 and 201 e If necessary also read
249. press WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 lt G1 gt Auto Lighting Optimizer 2 Select the setting Standard Select the desired setting then press E e E By lt gt is Disable during man expa SET l 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary ap e Under f 4 Custom Functions C Fn if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to 1 Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable and the setting cannot be changed e f a setting other than Disable is set and you use exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure the image may still come out bright If you want a darker exposure set this function to Disable e Depending on the shooting conditions noise may increase Fl In step 2 if you press the lt INFO gt button and uncheck lt v gt the Disable during man expo setting the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the lt M gt mode 125 13 Noise Reduction Settings m High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds At low ISO speeds the noise in the darker parts of the image shadow areas is further reduced Change the setting to suit the noise level aaae eeeh 1 Select High ISO speed NR Dust Delete Data e Under the I3 tab select High
250. provided with previous cameras does not support still photos and MOV movie files shot with this camera it is not compatible Use ImageBrowser EX 365 Installing the Software mau 4p e Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the software The software will not be installed correctly When downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX follow the steps below as with other EOS software included on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Note that Internet connection is necessary Downloading or installing software is not possible in environments with no Internet connection e Even if your computer already has ImageBrowser EX installed follow the steps below to reinstall ImageBrowser EX It will be updated to the latest version with features optimized for your camera Also the latest functions may be added with the auto update feature e For software other than ImageBrowser EX if a previous version is installed follow the steps below to reinstall the software The newer version will overwrite the previous version 1 Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer e For Macintosh double click to open the CD ROM icon displayed on the desktop then double click on setup 2 Click Easy Installation and follow the on screen instructions to install e Ifthe install screen for Microsoft Silverlight is displayed during installation install Microsoft Silverlight 3 Click Restart and remove the CD ROM after
251. ps to save battery power The menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used If you pressed the lt INFO gt button to display the shooting settings and then turn off the camera the shooting settings will be displayed when you turn on the camera again mM Registering My Menu mmm Under the My Menu tab you can register up to six menu options and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently sagaouugeereE Select My Menu settings My Menu settings e Under the xX tab select My Menu settings then press lt gt My Menu settings 2 Select Register to My Menu Register to My Menu Select Register to My Menu then Sort Delete item items press lt G mi Delete all items Register the desired items image quality 7 Select an item to register then press Beep Release shutter without card 3 z f Image review On the confirmation dialog select Lens aberration correction pid cane TAIE OK and press lt gt to register the IMENU aa item e You can register up to six items e To return to the screen in step 2 press the lt MENU gt button About My Menu Settings e Sort You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu Select Sort and select the item whose order you want to change Then press lt gt With displayed press the lt AV gt key to change the order then press lt 6 gt e Delete item items and Delete all items You can delete any o
252. ra Enable and you press the shutter button Card ttl will be displayed in the viewfinder and you cannot release the shutter mam Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after capture If Off is set the image will not be displayed immediately after image capture If Hold is set the image review will be displayed up until the Auto power off time During image review if you operate any camera controls such as pressing the shutter button halfway the image review will end Under the 81 tab select Image review then press lt 7 gt Select the desired setting then press lt 6 gt Image review 204 Handy Features a ee tM Setting the Auto Power off Time To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after the set time of idle operation elapses You can set this auto power off time When the camera has turned off due to auto power off you can turn it on again by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the following buttons lt MENU gt lt INFO gt lt gt gt lt gt etc If Disable is set either turn off the camera or press the lt NFO gt button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power Even when Disable is set if the camera is not used for 30 min the LCD monitor will turn off automatically To turn on the LCD monitor again press the lt INFO gt button Sr ha Under the 2
253. ridge xcctatreueestsisoseaccvevusaa 279 Picture Style ciccteceeteccecced 95 132 135 PIXeIS tat ie ihe aah A 88 Playback iccecileccoeed ignnanndeces gas 84 241 POP a A E 67 95 Possible shots 0 35 88 147 Power Auto power Off cccccccceeeees 205 Battery check 35 Household power 066 306 Possible shots 35 88 147 Recharge Sivccudencsscesiiietancreeanacen 28 Predictive Al Servo 06cccceee 98 386 Pressing completely 00 43 Pressing halfway 0 08 43 cadlalilals ees a eaa 279 Gifs 0 a ale keresa a 287 PAV OUT cot at eaen 283 Paper settingS ee 282 Photobook Set up 06 293 Print Order DPOF 0 289 Printing effects cceeeee 284 Tilt correction viskicnnvsecpenccsssiects 287 Program AE neiniie ee 86 Program shift isteach datlacettanteertaeendes 87 Protect image erase protection 266 KE Q Quick Control 44 76 151 184 250 Quick Control icati sees enuthaacnin 76 QUICK mode oo eeeeecceecctsteeeeeeeeeeees 166 Sel Rating Mark sa vsccteda cee Add caesar 248 RAW gene Roe a 22 91 RAW d PEG cccoctzentencecsansauddedesss 22 91 PRO CINAN CO asia user scree diene slate 28 Red eye reduction c cceee 108 Release shutter without card 204 Remote control shooting 307 Remote switch cccccceceeeeeeeeees 308 RESIZE eoero a EEE 27
254. rtain public performances exhibitions etc may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment _ This camera is compatible with SD memory cards SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards In this manual card refers to all these cards The camera does not come with a card for recording images movies Please purchase it separately N Item Check List Before starting check that all the following items have been included with your camera If anything is missing contact your dealer Lal Battery Pack Battery Charger Camera LP E8 LC E8 LC E8E with eyecup and body cap with protective cover Ce it EH Wide Strap Interface Cable EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Software Software Instruction Manuals Camera Instruction Manual this booklet Battery Charger LC E8 or LC E8E is provided The LC E8E comes with a power cord e f you purchased a Lens Kit check that the lens is included Depending on the Lens Kit type a lens instruction manual may also be included e Be careful not to lose any of the above items Software Instruction Manuals The Software Instruction Manuals are included on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk as PDF files See page 367 for instructions to look up information in the Software Instruction Manuals Conventions Used in this Manual mua Icons in this Manual lt ic gt Indicates the Main Dial
255. s Set up 3 Yellow Page Select the shooting settings screen color Feature guide Enable Disable Touch control Enable Disable Auto cleaning Enable Disable 223 Sensor cleaning Clean now Clean manually 226 Settings available when the GPS Receiver GP GPS eel ce mens E2 sold separately is attached EA Set up 4 Yellow Certification Logo Displays some of the logos of the camera s 305 Display certifications ena AUTEN Customize camera functions as desired Display copyright information Copyright information Enter author s name Enter copyright details Delete copyright information Clear all camera settings Clear all Custom Func C Fn For updating the firmware During firmware updates the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental operations x My Menu Green Register frequently used menu options and BALCH etunge Custom Functions 303 Clear settings Q When using a GPS device be sure to check the countries and areas of use and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region 321 tE Menu Settings For Movie Shooting 6 Shooting 1 Red Page 4L a L 4M M S1 S1 S82 83 T a4L 0 Beep Enable Touch to amp Disable Release shutter Enable Disable 204 without card Image quality Image review Off 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Hold 204 Lens aberration Peripheral illumination Enable Disable 129
256. s are prohibited remove the Eye Fi card from the camera If the image transfer does not function check the Eye Fi card and personal computer settings For details refer to the card s instruction manual e Depending on the wireless LAN s connection conditions the image transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted e Because of the transmission function the Eye Fi card may become hot The battery power will be consumed faster e During the image transfer auto power off will not take effect 313 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode m Set automatically O User selectable L Not selectable Disabled Basic Zone Creative Zone Movie ga Gt paya SON p ty avy Merl ot l Bi Poy settings selectable O O 0 O o o ojo o2 o2 o o o o j 0 Automatically setAuto SO o ooo OOOO O i Manual oloore Maximum for Auto OIO OJO Picture Automatic SelecionAuo eoe ee O O O O O Style Manual selection OO OO Or Ambience based shots O45 OO Oe O Light scene based shots O O O O Auto 2e 1 0 0 0 0 0 0O 0 O0 O O White Preset GO os balance Custom OIOIOIO os Correction Bracketing O O OJO 6 O 5 Auto Lighting Optimizer ooo oOolool o role ua correction C O O OFO O OFO O O OJO OJO O conection EE correction OU OTS O A OENE OS Long
257. s works in all shooting modes RP 1 Display the Live View image 7 Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor gja 2 Enable the touch shutter Tap dg on the screen s bottom left Each time you tap the icon it will toggle between s and C C Touch Shutter Enable Enables you to focus and shoot by tapping the screen om Touch Shutter Disable You can tap where you want to focus on the screen Then press the shutter button completely to shoot 3 Tap the screen to shoot e Tap the face or subject on the screen gt At the point you tap the camera will focus in the AF method that was set p 159 167 When FlexiZone Multi is set it will switch to FlexiZone Single gt When focus is achieved the AF point turns green and the picture is taken automatically If focus is not achieved the AF point turns orange Tap the face or subject on the screen again 168 C Shooting with the Touch Shutter C 4p Even if lt 2i gt continuous shooting is set single shooting will take effect The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view e When 6 Shutter AE lock button is set to 1 AE lock AF or 3 AE AF no AE lock under 4 Custom Functions C Fn autofocusing does not take effect El e You can also enable the touch shutter by setting Touch Shutter Enable in the tab
258. sage telling you to replace the card Replace it with a new card E For both JPEG and RAW images the file name will start with IMG_ Movie file names will start with MVI_ The extension will be JPG for JPEG images CR2 for RAW images and MOV for movies 209 Handy Features SSS mM Setting Copyright Information When you set the copyright information it will be appended to the image as Exif information See 1 Select Copyright information Certification Logo Display e Under the 4 tab select Copyright Custom Functions C Fn Copyright information information then press lt gt Clear settings firmware ver 1 0 0 Copyright information Select the option to be set Jisplay copyright info Select Enter author s name or A E P Enter copyright details then press lt gt gt The text entry screen will appear Select Display copyright info to check the copyright information currently set Select Delete copyright information to delete the copyright information currently set KAKAK KAXXA 1 63 Enter text al e Refer to Text Entry Procedure on QW E R T Y U IJO P the next page and enter the copyright ASDFGHIJIKL information a Z x c v BN M Me e Enter up to 63 alphanumeric Ce Gaane COK characters and symbols A Exit the setting e After entering the text press the lt MENU gt button to exit On the confirmation dia
259. sert the card e As shown by the illustration face the card s label side toward you and insert it until it clicks in place Close the cover e Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut When you set the power switch to lt ONs the number of possible shots 514 p 35 will be displayed on the LCD Possible shots monitor F e The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card image recording quality ISO speed etc Setting 1 Release shutter without card to Disable will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card p 204 31 Installing and Removing the Card Removing the Card 1 Open the cover e Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Make sure the access lamp is off then open the cover e f Recording is displayed close the cover 2 Remove the card Gently push in the card then let go to eject it e Pull the card straight out then close the cover 32 When the access lamp is lit or blinking it indicates that images are being written to or read by the card being erased or data is being transferred Do not open the card slot cover during this time Also never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking Otherwise it can damage the image data card or camera e Removing the card e Removing the battery e Shaking or bangin
260. sesseenes 311 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode 314 System MaD Doe ee ee E eon eee R 316 Ment Settings ccnre Girth enc acunced clans nde ht a 318 Troubleshooting G de zsmin n eatetikengtantee 324 il 60 ge 0 eei as a ea a EA 337 SPOS CINC ALOIS ea A A E 338 Handling Precautions EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM EF 518 135mm f 3 5 5 0 1S STM riisin Senreaerccaanci ce 346 salety Precautions seisis eiceceatadnade eda etelieeaanaas 349 14 Downloading Images to a Personal Computer 361 Downloading Images to a Personal Computer 0cceeeeeeeees 362 PDOUP INE Sotware ennan taste senaa se satadeys E a 364 Installing the SOmWaAle vi iiiisaiscdcusinccods cocsdeceeiveeeenavastesnglicedecaceeaces 366 Software Instruction Manual ceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 367 15 Quick Reference Guide and Index 369 Quick Reference Guide ccccccccecececeeeeseesseseeaseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 370 late l German a tree ramen D A a a a reer erence nerr rr erry 382 Handling Precautions ma Camera Care e This camera is a precision instrument Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock e The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater If you accidentally drop the camera into water promptly consult the nearest Canon Service Center Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth If the camera has been exposed to salty air wipe it with a well wrung w
261. set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 e A movie cannot be rotated 247 Mam Setting Ratings mae You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks L E JENE This function is called rating a re 1 Select Rating Histogram disp Brightness Under the 12 tab select Rating bates oe then press lt gt Slide show Rating Ctrl over HDMI Disable 2 Select an image or movie e Press the lt lt P gt key to select an image or movie to be rated e You can display three images by pressing the lt EF Q gt button To return to the single image display press the lt amp gt button 3 Rate the image or movie e Press the lt AV gt key to select a rating gt The total number of images and movies rated will be counted for each rating To rate another image or movie repeat steps 2 and 3 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 248 MI Setting Ratings Do S E E The total number of images with a given rating that can be displayed is 999 If there are more than 999 images with a given rating will be displayed for that rating Taking Advantage of Ratings With gt 2 Image jump w 7 you can display only images and movies with a specific rating e With gt 2 Slide show you can play back only images and movies with a specific rating e With Digital Photo Professional provided software p 364 you can select only images and movies with a specific ra
262. set ISO 12800 or H equivalent to ISO 25600 during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting the ISO speed will change to H equivalent to ISO 12800 ISO AUTO If the ISO speed is set to AUTO the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway As indicated on the next page the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode Auto AUTO 100 200 400 s00 1600 3200 6400 12200 93 ISO Changing the ISO Speed FG ba RIA Eo 1 Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures 2 Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set 3 If fill flash results in overexposure ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set 4 Except in the G Bi and FH modes 5 Automatically set within ISO 400 ISO 1600 or up to the maximum limit in the CA 2 2a BW amp and lt P gt modes if you use bounce flash with an external Speedlite F e When AUTO is set the ISO speed is indicated in whole stop increments However the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments Therefore in the image s shooting information p 270 you may find an ISO speed such as 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed e Inthe lt gt mode the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used even if ISO 100 is not displayed N Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for ISO Auto For ISO Auto you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400 ISO 6400 Under
263. shoot while the camera sets everything automatically p 76 314 Also to prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations the main shooting settings cannot be changed A Scene Intelligent Auto AF brightness flash color tone are set according io Scene o al 514 El If you set the Mode Dial to lt SCN gt while the LCD monitor is off press the lt Q gt button to check the shooting mode before shooting p 71 AF Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto lt 4J gt is a fully automatic mode The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically It also adjusts focus automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving p 61 He 7 4 Set the Mode Dial to lt A gt cD Wa AF point 2 Aim any AF point over the subject Allthe AF points will be used to focus and generally the closest object will be focused Aiming the center AF point over the subject will make focusing easier Focus the subject e Press the shutter button halfway and the lens focusing ring will rotate to focus gt The dot inside the AF point achieving focus flashes briefly in red At the same time the beeper will sound and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will light up gt If necessary the built in flash will be raised automatically Focus confirmation light 58 G Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelli
264. shooting using the master function of the built in flash see Wireless Flash Photography on page 229 When performing wireless flash shooting with radio or optical transmission using the master function of the external Speedlite refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual e Flash exposure compensation See Flash Exposure Compensation on page 120 e Flash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting e E TTL Il is the standard mode of EX series Speedlites for automatic Flash mode deal sa am flash shooting e Manual flash is for advanced users who want to set the Flash output 1 1 to 1 128 themselves e Regarding other flash modes refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions Built in flash settings E TTL Il flash metering ETTL M MUTI TTL ExtA Ext 221 MM Setting the Flash ae Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions The Custom Functions displayed under External flash C Fn setting will vary depending on the Speedlite model Flash control Enable Evaluative Flash firing E TTL Il meter Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO Built in flash settings External flash func setting External flash C Fn setting lear settings External flash C Fn setting Auto power off O Enabled 1 Disabled Clear the Settings Flash control Flash firing Enable E TTL l meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO B
265. sist If the external Speedlite s AF assist beam firing Custom Function is set to Disabled the Speedlite will not emit the AF assist beam even if the camera s C Fn 4 is set to 0 2 or 3 C Fn 5 Mirror lockup 0 1 Disable Enable Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex mirror action mirror shock which can disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or close up macro shooting See page 142 for the mirror lockup procedure MM Custom Function Settings C Fn IV Operation Others C Fn 6 Shutter AE lock button 0 AF AE lock 1 AE lock AF This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately Press the lt gt button to autofocus and press the shutter button halfway to apply AE lock 2 AF AF lock no AE lock In the Al Servo AF operation you can press the lt gt button to stop the AF operation momentarily This prevents the AF from being thrown off by any obstacle passing between the camera and subject The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken 3 AE AF no AE lock This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly During Al Servo AF you can press the lt gt button to start or stop the Al Servo AF operation The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken Thus the optimum focusing and exposure will always be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment bl During Live View shooting or movie shooting e With sett
266. small boxes are the AF points 2 Select the AF point e Pressing lt gt or the lt gt button will toggle between automatic selection and manual selection e Use the lt lt gt gt keys to select an AF point To return the AF point to the center press lt gt or the lt 1 gt button e You can also tap the LCD monitor screen to select the AF point During manual selection tap on the screen to switch to automatic selection Liiati mum G 166 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method Focus the subject Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt The Live View image will turn off the reflex mirror will go back down and AF will be executed No picture is taken gt When focus is achieved the AF point that achieved focus will turn green and the Live View image will reappear If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange and blink Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 146 4 When Quick mode is set Continuous AF cannot be set p 156 e The Quick mode cannot be set for movie shooting E You cannot take a picture during autofocusing Take the picture while the Live View image is displayed 167 C Shooting with the Touch Shutter mau Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen you can focus and take the picture automatically Thi
267. ss lt gt again The lt gt icon will disappear e To protect another image repeat step 3 Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 266 o gt Protecting Images a tN Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time Select images or All images on card in gt 1 Protect All images in folder images all the images in the folder or Unprotect all images in folder All images on card on the card will be protected Unprotect all images on card To cancel the image protection select Unprotect all images in folder or Unprotect all images on card MENU fm WD If you format the card p 48 the protected images will also be erased El e Movies can also be protected Once an image is protected it cannot be erased by the camera s erase function To erase a protected image you must first cancel the protection e f you erase all the images p 269 only the protected images will remain This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once 267 q Erasing Images sx You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in one batch Protected images p 266 will not be erased q Once an image is erased it cannot be recovered Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it To prevent important images from being erased accidentally protect them Erasing a AL image will er
268. ss 137 Ol SOMAL EE leona 138 Wind filter oiccen 199 Wireless flash shooting 229 Custom wireless shooting 234 Easy wireless shooting 231 Canon The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of October 2014 For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date contact any Canon Service Center For the latest version Instruction Manual refer to the Canon Web site CPH E063 003 CANON INC 2014
269. ssage will appear on the camera s LCD monitor Press lt gt to stop printing After fixing the problem resume printing For details on how to fix a printing problem refer to the printer s instruction manual Paper Error Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer Ink Error Check the printer s ink level and check the waste ink tank Hardware Error Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems File Error The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable 288 Digital Print Order Format DPOF mau You can set the print type date imprinting and file number imprinting The print settings will be applied to all print ordered images They cannot be set individually for each image Setting the Printing Options er Select Print order Protect images Under the 11 tab select Print Rotate image ase Wais order then press lt gt Print order Photobook Set up Creative filters Resize Print order 2 Select Set up O Standard 0 prints e Select Set up then press lt gt Date off File No off Sel Image By i All image Set up MENU gt 3 Set the options as desired Set the Print type Date and File No Select the option to be set then press lt 1 gt Select the desired setting then press lt 6 gt Print type Date File No Print order Print or
270. st beam firing setting e You cannot set Multi Shot Noise Reduction for bulb exposures e If you turn off the power or change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone mode movie shooting or bulb the setting will change to Standard e If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake the noise reduction effect may be minimal e f you are handholding the camera keep it steady to prevent camera shake Using a tripod is recommended iE e f you shoot a moving subject the subject s movement may leave afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark e The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns lattice stripes etc or flat single tone images e Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal shooting During the processing of the images BUSY will be displayed and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed e 3 Dust Delete Data cannot be set e f Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set direct printing p 280 is not possible Long Exposure Noise Reduction You can reduce noise in long exposures sdMlauuecc ees 1 Select Long exp noise Dust Delete Data reduction ISO Auto Max 6400 WoTCISEGE COTE iat Under the 3 tab select Long High ISO speed NR ull exp noise reduction then press lt gt 127 MEN Noise Reduction Settings Long exp noise reduction Set the setting Disable Select the des
271. sure setting is set at the moment of exposure regardless of the metering mode setting 118 Setting Exposure Compensation memmmmmmmm Avi4 Setting Exposure Compensation Set exposure compensation if the exposure without flash does not come out as desired This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes except lt M gt You can set the exposure compensation up to 5 stops in 1 3 stop increments Making it brighter Hold down the lt Avd gt button and turn the lt g gt dial to the right Increased exposure Making it darker Hold down the lt Avg gt button and turn the lt s gt dial to the left P 1 125 F56 400 Decreased exposure As shown in the figure the exposure level is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder Decreased exposure for a darker image e After taking the picture cancel the 1 125 F11 400 exposure compensation by setting it back to 0 Dark exposure Increased exposure fora brighter image E e The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up to only 2 stops If the exposure compensation amount exceeds 2 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt q gt or lt gt e f you want to set exposure compensation exceeding 2 stops setting it with 432 Expo comp AEB p 121 or with the Quick Control screen p 44 is recommended 119 Setting Exposure Compensation Flash Exposure Compensation Set flash exposure compe
272. t gt Setting Clear all camera settings will reset the camera to the default settings as shown on the next page Clear all camera settings Cancel 2 FAQ Clearing all camera settings After the procedure above select Clear all Custom Func C Fn in 4 Clear settings to clear all the Custom Function settings p 296 214 Handy Features Shooting Settings ISO Auto Maximum 6400_ compensation AEB Built in flash settings Normal firing Flash exposure 0 Zero compensation Custom Functions Unchanged External flash Unchanged function setting Image recording Settings image quality Picture Style Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination Enable Correction correction data retained Chromatic aberration Disable Correction correction data retained White balance Auto Custom White Balance Canceled White balance Canceled correction White balance Canceled bracketing Long exposure noise reduction High ISO speed noise Standard reduction Continuous Auto cleaning Enable Dust Delete Data Erased Disable Camera Settings Release shutter Image jump with 73 ete Screen color Copyright information My Menu settings Unchanged 215 Handy Features Live View Shooting Movie Shooting Live View shooting AF method AF method Tracking Movie Servo AF Enable Continuous AF Enable AF with sh Touch Shutter Disable Dk acting ONE SHOT Grid display
273. t gt 2 Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera s LCD monitor and on the personal computer instead of horizontally You can change the setting for this feature Under the 1 tab select Auto rotate then press lt gt The available settings are described below Select the option On 6 The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera s LCD monitor and on the computer On The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer Off The vertical image is not automatically rotated FAQ The vertical image is not rotated during the image review immediately after it is captured Press the lt gt gt button and the image playback will display the rotated image On 6 is set but the image does not rotate during playback Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while Auto rotate was set to Off If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down the image may not be rotated automatically for playback In such a case see Rotating the Image on page 247 On the camera s LCD monitor want to rotate an image captured when On had been set Set On 6 then play back the image It will be rotated The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen The software used is not compatible with image rotation Use the software provided with the camera
274. t ON gt 5 Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear on the TV screen Nothing will be displayed on the camera s LCD monitor e To play back movies see page 254 4D e Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC DC400ST sold separately Images may not be displayed if you use a different cable e If the video system format does not match the TV s the images will not be displayed properly If this happens switch to the proper video system format with 2 Video system 265 Protecting Images mu Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally tW Protecting a Single Image nddoMide lt e s 1 Select Protect images Protect images Under the 11 tab select Protect Rotate image aaa sie images then press lt gt _ Print order gt The protect setting screen will Photobook Set up Creative filters appa Resize Protect images Select Select images Select images e Select Select images then press All images in folder 3 Unprotect all images in tolder i ee l All images on card gt The images will be displayed Unprotect all images on card Image protect icon gt g 3 Protect the image Press the lt A gt key to select the image to be protected then press lt gt gt When an image is protected the lt o gt icon will appear on the top of the screen e Tocancel the image protection pre
275. t be emitted However if an EX series Speedlite sold separately equipped with an LED light is used the LED light will turn on for AF assist when necessary e In magnified view the higher the magnification the more difficult focusing will be because of camera shake when shooting hand held as well as when the lens focus mode switch is set to lt MF gt Using a tripod is recommended 164 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult e Low contrast subjects such as the blue sky solid color flat surfaces or when highlights or shadow details are lost Subjects in low light Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction Subjects with repetitive patterns skyscraper windows computer keyboards etc Fine lines and subject outlines Under a light source whose brightness color or pattern keeps changing Night scenes or points of light When the image flickers under fluorescent or LED light sources Extremely small subjects Subjects at the edge of the picture Subjects strongly reflecting light The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject such as an animal in a cage Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur A subject approaching or moving away from the camera Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus Soft focus effect is applied with a so
276. t collecting the Dust Delete Data When the Dust Delete Data is obtained a message will appear Select OK and the menu will reappear e If the data was not obtained successfully an error message will appear Follow the Preparation procedure on the preceding page then select OK Take the picture again About the Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained it is appended to all the JPEG and images captured thereafter Before an important shoot it is recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again For details about using Digital Photo Professional provided software p 364 to erase dust spots refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual p 367 The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly affects the image file size 4 Be sure to use a solid white object such as a new sheet of white paper If the paper has any pattern or design it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software 225 m Manual Sensor Cleaning mx Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a blower etc Before cleaning the sensor detach the lens from the camera The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended eae Select Sensor cleaning O O O O i e Screen color l
277. tab select Auto power Auto power off ___ 30 ser off then press lt 61 gt Select the desired 1 min setting then press lt gt 2 min 4 min 8 min 15 min Disable M Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read adgaudt Mec lt s Under the 2 tab select LCD Auto power off in brightness then press lt G1 gt With the LED brightness E eee adjustment screen displayed press the Thne zcne lt lt P gt key to adjust the brightness then press lt gt When checking the exposure of an image set the LCD monitor brightness to 4 and prevent the ambient light from affecting the reviewed image 205 Handy Features WM Creating and Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images Creating a Folder acdandMc lt Select Select folder Select folder Under the 1 tab select Select File numbering Continuous Ane Onea folder then press lt amp gt Format card Select folder Select Create folder JENON 24 Select Create folder then press Ch a lt gt Select folder Create a new folder peat e Select OK then press lt gt gt A new folder with the folder number increased by one is created Cancel 20
278. tains or reflex mirror may get damaged e Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor The blowing force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor e Ifthe battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor the beeper will sound as a warning Stop cleaning the sensor e f a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended 22 Wireless Flash Photography You can use the built in flash for wireless flash shooting The camera s built in flash can work as a master unit with Canon Speedlites with a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite s to fire Canceling the slave unit s auto power off To cancel the slave unit s auto power off press the camera s lt gt button If you are using manual flash firing press the slave unit s test firing PILOT button to cancel the auto power off El Be sure to also read the information about wireless flash photography in the Speedlite s instruction manual Using Wireless Flash memme Slave Unit Settings and Position Regarding your Speedlite slave unit refer to its instruction manual and set it as follows The settings other than the ones below for the slave unit s control are all set with the camera Different types of Canon Speedlite slave units can be used and controlled together 1 Set the Speedlite as a slave unit 2
279. tch the existing aloum s settings e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu and return to the movie shooting screen 3 Shoot the video snapshot Go to Creating a Video Snapshot Album p 189 6D You cannot select an album shot with another camera 192 M4 Shooting Video Snapshots U SE O Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots e You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration approx 2 sec 4 sec or 8 sec each e Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots e Changing the Movie rec size p 185 e Changing the Sound rec setting from Auto Manual to Disable or from Disable to Auto Manual p 198 e Updating the firmware e You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot e The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate Depending on the frame rate the shooting duration displayed during playback may not be exact Playing an Album You can play back a completed album in the same way as a normal E movie p 254 1 Play back the movie e Press the lt gt gt button to display images 2 Select the album Press the lt lt gt key to select an album On the single image display the Sia 22 icon displayed on the upper left indicates that the image is a video snapshot 3 Play back the album Press
280. teady or use a tripod e The depth of field depends not only on the aperture but also on the lens and on the subject distance Since wide angle lenses have a wide depth of field range of acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus you need not set a high aperture f number to obtain a sharp picture from the foreground to the background On the other hand a telephoto lens has a narrow depth of field The closer the subject the narrower the depth of field A farther subject will have a wider depth of field e Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not blink If you press the shutter button halfway and change the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed the shutter speed display will also change to maintain the same exposure amount of light reaching the image sensor If you exceed the adjustable shutter speed range the shutter speed display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained If the picture will be too dark the 30 30 sec shutter speed display will blink If this happens turn the lt gt dial to the left to set a lower aperture f number or increase the ISO speed If the picture will be too bright the 4000 1 4000 sec shutter speed display will blink If this happens turn the lt s 2 gt dial to the right to set a higher aperture f number or decrease the ISO speed 113 Av Changing the Depth of Field SSSR SSS eee 4 Using the Bui
281. tep 5 e After changing the time zone check that the correct date time has been set e You can also set the daylight saving time with 2 Time zone e The 2 Time zone and 2 Date Time daylight saving time settings are linked 3 Ma Selecting the Interface Language mum Display the menu screen e Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen daray 2 Under the 2 tab select Auto power off 1 min Language LCD brightness pee E LCD tt off Enable e Press the lt lt P gt key to select the Time zone 2 tab Date Time 02 28 13 13 30 Pore ee e Press the lt AV gt key to select Video system NTSC Language G the sixth item from the top then press lt gt 7 Norsk Romina Set the desired language EJE Svenska T rk e A Pancala EEan E ty Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the Nederlands EAAQVIKa menine language then press lt gt Dansk PYCCKMi P f Portugues Polki EBM gt The interface language will change Suomi e tina t Italiana Magyar YepaitceKa 38 Attaching and Detaching a LenS mx The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses and EF S lenses The camera cannot be used with EF M lenses Remove the caps e Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows a Attach the lens e Align the lens red or white index with the camera s index matching t
282. terminals E e Do not connect any other device s output to the camera s lt HDMI OUT gt terminal Doing so may cause a malfunction Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images In such a case use the stereo AV cable AVC DC400ST sold separately to connect to the TV Using HDMI CEC TV Sets If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC you can use the TV set s remote control for playback operations An HDMI standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that you can control them with one remote control unit 1 Set Ctrl over HDMI to Enable Under the gt 2 tab select Ctrl over HDMI then press lt gt Select Enable then press lt gt Ctrl over HDMI Disable Enable 263 Viewing the Images on TV 2 Connect the camera to a TV set e Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV gt The TV s input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera 3 Press the camera s lt gt gt button gt An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV s remote control to play back images Select an image Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the button to select an image Still photo playback menu 5 Press the remote control s Enter button TENA gt The menu appears and you can f he pl k i Movie playback menu perform the playback operat
283. the 3 2 aspect ratio Since the aspect ratio information is appended to the image the image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the image with the provided software In the case of the 4 3 16 9 and 1 1 aspect ratios the aspect ratio lines will appear during image playback but the lines are not actually drawn on the image Image Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count approx fy ages L 5184x3456 4608x3456 5184x2912 3456x3456 17 9 megapixels 16 0 megapixels 15 1 megapixels 11 9 megapixels 3456x2304 3072x2304 3456x1944 2304x2304 8 0 megapixels 7 0 megapixels 6 7 megapixels 5 3 megapixels 6 ixels 2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456 1728x1728 4 5 megapixels 4 0 megapixels 3 8 megapixels 3 0 megapixels 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 720x480 640x480 720x400 480x480 850 000 pixels 810 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels Q e Asterisked image recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect ratio e The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger than the recorded area Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting e f you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1 1 aspect ratio the images may not be correctly printed 157 Cs Menu Function Settings
284. the Live View shooting cautions on pages 171 and 172 if e In Basic Zone modes the shooting result will be the same as in the lt 45 gt mode Also the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left p 176 e Inthe lt Av gt and lt Tv gt shooting modes the settings will be the same as in the lt P gt mode Settable menu functions will differ between Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone modes p 322 e The ISO speed ISO 100 ISO 6400 shutter speed and aperture are set automatically In Creative Zone modes you can press the lt gt button to lock the exposure AE lock p 123 198 After applying AE lock during movie shooting you can cancel it by pressing the lt E gt button AE lock setting is retained until you press the lt E gt button In Creative Zone modes you can hold down the lt Avii4 gt button and turn the lt s gt dial to set the exposure compensation e Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and ISO speed at the bottom of the screen This is the exposure setting for taking a still photo p 179 The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for still photo shooting e f you shoot a movie with autoexposure the shutter speed and aperture will not be recorded in the image information Exif Using an EX series Speedlite Sold Separately Equipped with an LED
285. the power switch to lt gt e Set the Mode Dial to any Shooting mode except lt M gt J Press the lt g gt button to start shooting a movie e To stop movie shooting press the lt gt button again Microphone 380 Quick Reference Guide Image Playback INFO Shooting information mr eT e ee SH 381 index mem 10 sec or 2 sec delay 00 106 1280X720 canoes ae etoi 185 1920x1080 rerne 185 4 or 9 image index display 242 640X480 snnnsseennnennnernnrnesnnrnsresseeee 185 9 point AF auto selection 100 CA E Scene Intelligent Auto 58 AC Adapter Kit 306 Access lampe irnren eean 32 PCCOSSONES are aaia R 3 Adobe RGB 141 AE OG ica aaa ae becmmeuaeees 123 PAE S EE 121 298 AF Focusing AF DOIN ciee 100 Al FOCUS Al Focus AF 99 Al SERVO AI Servo AF 5 98 PASE AP wsorcessesreneeseciccseccceds 61 98 Ambience based shots 77 Aperture priority AE 0 000 112 Art bold effect 154 276 Aspect ratio eseeeesssesseerer rrene 157 Audio video OUT n 252 265 Auto Lighting Optimizer 125 Auto playback cece 258 Auto power Off 34 205 PUTO TESON EET 209 Auto rotate of vertical images 212 PULOIOCUS niiae 97 100 Automatic selection of AF point 100 Av Aperture prior
286. this occurs take the camera away from the fluorescent lighting 51 Feature Guide mE The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or option It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the Quick Control screen to set a shooting function in Live View shooting movie shooting or during playback When you select a function or option on the Quick Control screen the Feature guide description is displayed The Feature guide turns off when you tap the description or proceed with the operation e Shooting mode Sample P sceme Intelligent Auto Frogram AE Fully automatic shooting mode Auto setting of shutter speed with auto scene detection and aperture Other settings for diverse shooting situations tan be configured manually Quick Control Sample pa Pil Protect images ig _ prevent accidental 2 0 horse Image sde Tv 1 125 s AUTO and quality Ja adaa ee ee eee ee eae Adjust image bnighiness Autoc shoot with dierent eqposuires Exposure comp AEB setting Shooting functions Live View shooting tW Disabling the Feature Guide Select Feature guide e Under the 3 tab select Feature guide then press lt gt Select Disable then press lt gt Disable 52 A Touch Screen Operations mums The LCD monitor is a touch sensitive panel that you can operate with your fingers Tap Quick Control Sample display e Use your finger to ta
287. ting still photos only e With Windows 8 1 Windows 8 or Windows 7 etc you can see each file s rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer still photos only 249 Q Quick Control During Playback mau During playback you can press the lt Q gt button to set any of the following on Protect images Rotate image X Rating Creative filters E i Resize JPEG images only and m Image jump w lt 3 For movies only the functions in bold above can be set Press the lt Q gt button e During image playback press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control screen will appear 5 2 Select a function and set it e Press the lt AV gt key to select a function gt The name and current setting of the selected function are displayed at the bottom of the screen Set it by pressing the lt lt P gt key e For Creative filters and Resize press lt 1 gt and set the function For details see page 274 for Creative filters and page 277 for Resize To cancel press the lt MENU gt button 3 Exit the setting e Press the lt Q gt button to exit the Quick Control screen 250 QJ Quick Control During Playback To rotate an image set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 amp If 1 Auto rotate is set to On or Off the Rotate image setting will be recorded to the image but the camera will not rotate the image for display
288. ting sxe Remote Controller RC 6 Sold Separately This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to approx 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera You can either shoot immediately or use a 2 sec delay Set the self timer to lt gt p 106 e Point the remote controller toward the camera s remote control sensor and press the transmit button gt The camera will autofocus gt When focus is achieved the self timer lamp will light up and the picture will be taken WD e Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently Try to keep the camera away from such light sources e f you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and operate it it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently E e Remote Controller RC 1 RC 5 sold separately can also be used e Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX series Speedlite equipped with a remote release function e The Remote Controller can also be used during movie shooting p 173 Note that still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode is not possible with the Remote Controller RC 5 307 Remote Control Shooting f Remote Switch RS 60E3 Sold Separately Remote Switch RS 60E3 sold separately comes with an approx 60 cm 2 0 ft cord When connected to the camera s remote control terminal it can be pressed halfway and completely just like th
289. tion Manual selection point selection between the D pe center AF point and automatic a a AF point selection 377 Quick Reference Guide SSS ISO ISO Speed Press the lt ISO gt button Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt s gt dial to select the ISO speed then press lt gt When AUTO is selected the ISO speed is set automatically When you press the shutter button halfway the ISO speed setting is displayed auTO 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 Drive Mode Press the lt lt Gi F gt button Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt s gt dial to select the drive mode then press lt 6 gt J Single shooting Continuous shooting Drive mode Self timer 10 sec Remote Continuous shooting control 2 Self timer 2 sec c Self timer C ontinuous OS amp Se 2 378 Quick Reference Guide Cy Live dan Shooting a Press the lt gt button to display the Live View image Press the shutter button halfway to _ focus completely to take the picture Battery Life with Live View Shooting Temperature No Flash 50 Flash Use At 23 C 73 F Approx 200 shots Approx 180 shots 379 Quick Reference Guide gt Shooting Movies e Set
290. tive metering linked to all AF points e Partial metering approx 9 of viewfinder at center e Spot metering approx 4 of viewfinder at center e Center weighted average metering Metering brightness range EV 1 20 at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Exposure control Program AE Scene Intelligent Auto Flash Off Creative Auto Portrait Landscape Close up Sports Special scene Night Portrait Handheld Night Scene HDR Backlight Control Program Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE Manual exposure ISO speed Basic Zone modes ISO 100 ISO 6400 set automatically Recommended Portrait ISO 100 Handheld Night Scene exposure index ISO 100 ISO 12800 set automatically Creative Zone modes ISO 100 ISO 12800 set manually whole stop increments ISO 100 ISO 6400 set automatically maximum ISO speed settable for ISO Auto or ISO expansion to H equivalent to ISO 25600 Exposure compensation Manual 5 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments AEB 2 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments Can be combined with manual exposure compensation 339 Specifications AE lock e Shutter Type Shutter speeds Flash Built in flash External flash Flash metering Flash exposure compensation FE lock PC terminal e Drive System Drive mode Continuous shooting speed Max burst Approx e Live View Shooting Aspect ratio settings Focusing 340 Auto Applied in One Shot AF with evaluative meter
291. tness and Contrast Auto Lighting Optimizer 125 Noise Reduction Settings sis caveite cistnsiasus seetees dats ted newtaweadeern cay 126 Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction 129 3a Customizing Image Characteristics Picture Style 132 Sa Registering Preferred Image Characteristics Picture Style 135 WB Matching the Light Source White Balance cceee 137 WB Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source ceeees 139 Setting the Color Reproduction Range Color Space 141 Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 142 Cs Shooting with the LCD Monitor cccceeceeesceeeeteeeeteeeeees 146 SHOOCUNG FUNCHON SCHINGS s dake Giseaeees 151 Using Creative Filters ccccccssecceesseecesssececseeeeeseeeeeseeees 152 Menu Function Settings x c c025 eyes Soc iavecsciat ieses hander eases 156 Changing the Autofocus Method AF Method eeeeees 159 CS Shooting with the Touch Shutter cccccccccccccceseeseeseeeens 168 MF FOCUS Manually iseia aeti 170 12 Contents aS 6 Shooting Movies 173 MOR Shooting MOVIES csaracrrstazcenicecsseieusrai oan cnpealecanstigem ina eestales 174 AULOEXDOSUIE SHOOUMG erineda aaneen e iat GaN 174 Manual Exposure Shooting ccccsccccccsesesesessssesssssssseseneneaes 177 Shooting Still Photos ovccsivevisiicexssodelgveteetasgugserseatyscreeelend
292. tness is metered to obtain the standard exposure CJ Spot metering This is for metering a specific part of the subject or scene The gray area in the left figure is where the brightness is metered to obtain the standard exposure This metering mode is for advanced users 117 Changing the Metering Mode CJ Center weighted average metering The brightness is metered at the image center and then averaged for the entire scene This metering mode is for advanced users Metering Range During Live View Shooting e With evaluative metering and CJ center weighted average metering the metering range is almost the same as with viewfinder shooting e With partial metering and L spot metering the metering range slightly differs from viewfinder shooting The approximate metering ranges are as shown below Partial metering Spot metering The figures show when Grid 2 is set The metering ranges are not displayed on the LCD monitor F With evaluative metering during viewfinder shooting the exposure setting will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved With partial metering CJ spot metering and CJ center weighted average metering exposure setting is set at the moment of exposure The exposure setting is not locked when you press the shutter button halfway During Live View shooting the expo
293. ton to end the Live View shooting You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions p 33 Normal angle 62 Disabling Flash sua The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically In places where flash photography is prohibited use the lt gt Flash Off mode This mode is also effective for capturing the particular ambience of a scene such as candlelight scenes E Flash off Alash disabled Note Dark scenes prone to camera shake O Te am au 514 X Shooting Tips e Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder blinks Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur the viewfinder s shutter speed display will blink Hold the camera steady or use a tripod When using a zoom lens use the wide angle end to reduce blur caused by camera shake e Take portraits without flash In low light conditions tell the subject to keep still until the picture is taken If the person moves during the exposure he or she may look blurred in the picture 63 Creative Auto Shooting ma In the lt A gt mode you can easily change the depth of field drive mode and flash firing You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your images The default settings are the same as the lt j gt mode CA stands for Creative Auto FS Set the Mode Dial to lt gt io 1 We Creative Auto 2 Press the lt
294. trait Monochrome then press lt gt Landscape e To adjust the parameters of a Picture equa 0K Style that has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility provided software select the Picture Style here 135 32 Registering Preferred Image Characteristics Detail set G27 User Def 1 Select a parameter Picture Style Landscape Select a parameter such as Sharpness Contrast amp Saturation Color tone Sharpness then press lt gt OSharpness Set the parameter e Press the lt lt P gt key to adjust the parameter as desired then press lt gt For details see Customizing Image Characteristics on pages 132 134 Picture Style e Press the lt MENU gt button to register User Def 1 Landscape the modified Picture Style The 05002000 Picture Style selection screen will then reappear Ea gt The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of User Def INFO Detail set SET is GD e f a Picture Style has already been registered under User Def changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style e If you execute Clear all camera settings p 214 all the User Def settings will revert to their defaults Picture Styles registered via EOS Utility provided software will have only their modified parameters reverted to their default settings Fl e To shoot with a registered Picture Style follow step 2 on pag
295. ts ccceeees 103 165 202 Manual focusing 103 170 Out of focus 41 42 103 165 Recompose susie eudener tensile 61 Folder Create Select 00 206 Format card initialization 48 Frame rate oinecee catch seid saa 185 Full Auto Scene Intelligent Auto 58 Full High Definition F ADI accra ae 185 252 Grainy BW oaeee 154 275 Grid display ei cc ecceseeeresieiies 156 198 Handheld Night Scene 0 73 ADMI 252 262 HDMI CEC nsee 263 HDR Backlight Control 74 High ISO speed noise reduction 126 High Definition HD 185 252 Highlight alert essen 272 Highlight detail loss 008 272 Highlight tone priority 02 299 Histogram Brightness RGB 272 OW SOG ati caeae esa ENAA 309 Household powevt eee 306 ICC PROT Gate cote aee 141 384 Image Auto playback ceeee 258 Auto rotate cic venezccdenncancccssceiins 212 NAS Ceuta hott naten winters 268 Highlight GIGI seule ceateeieresedeves 272 Histogram cxcetaceectettsc ease genes 272 Image characteristics Picture Style 95 132 135 VGN aeree taie SEE 242 Jump display Image browSingQ 2 0 243 Magnified view n 244 Manual rotate asasen 247 Negotiate eateries 208 Playback a e 84 241 POLE iecoris 266 Rating eirean 248 Review time cccccseeeeeeeees 204 Shooting
296. tter button halfway D A l gt The exposure setting will be CN displayed L iy j 2 Press the lt gt button 64 gt The lt gt icon lights up in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked AE lock e Each time you press the lt gt button the current autoexposure setting is locked 3 Recompose and take the picture f you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots hold down the lt gt button and press the shutter button to take another shot AE Lock Effects Metering Mode AF Point Selection Method p 100 p 117 Automatic Selection Manual Selection OE AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the a point that achieved focus selected AF point SJ CIC AE lock is applied at the center AF point When the lens focus mode switch is set to lt MF gt AE lock is applied at the center AF point 123 Locking the Flash Exposure mm If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash the subject may turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background etc This is when you should use FE lock After setting the proper flash exposure for the subject you can recompose put the subject toward the side and shoot This feature can also be used with a Canon EX series Speedlite FE stands for Flash Exposure 1 Press the lt 4 gt button gt The built in flash will rise e Press the shutter button halfway and look in the vie
297. tting Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes Default setting O User selectable 1 Not selectable eee eee Aan KKJ OA E StS fotoo a E A O e a e R O S a CAA rom eee ReRe rash F Fennema OT f oO omen elo le lel oo arencs tasasem o o o ololojo lightscene based shots ps lolololo C uirestaparngtetscooraoesl top 1 1 1 1 1 If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to lt OFF gt it will revert to the default settings except the self timer 76 Drive Shoot by Ambience Selection mx Except in the lt gt lt gt and lt g gt Basic Zone modes you can select the ambience for shooting SCN omen Jal eS ee eID Standard setting FO O O O O O Nosetting 7 o TO TOTS wrameee os COCCOLE PST OTS TOTO SO O tow senders ston tee PST SLOTS O OY e tow senders sron POTS TOT SLOTS O tow Sanda Seong Brahe POPOL OLS O OLS firmen Darker otee e e e iomem vocor OL OT OOO O aue awi sepa 1 Set the Mode Dial to any of the following modes lt A gt lt gt lt 24 gt lt B gt lt gt or lt SCN gt e Ifthe shooting mode is lt SCN gt set one of the following lt gt or lt i gt Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button to display the Live View image gt You can check the ambience effect on the screen On the Quick Control screen select the desired ambience e Press the lt Q gt
298. uch screen p 53 e The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen e To cancel press the lt MENU gt button e For details about each menu item see page 318 47 720 Formatting the Card memme lf the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer format the card with the camera Q When the card is formatted all images and data in the card will be erased Even protected images will be erased so make sure there is nothing you need to keep If necessary transfer the images to a computer etc before formatting the card anaddli Select Format card Select folder e Under the 1 tab select Format File numbering Continuous Auto rotate Wy i card then press lt GE gt Format card Format card 2 Format the card Format card Select OK then press lt G1 gt HOTA das gt The card will be formatted 9 76 65 used 7 81 GB gt When the formatting is completed f Low level format the menu will reappear Cancel OK 7 76 GB used e For low level formatting press the fe how level format lt gt button to append Low level Cancel OK format with a checkmark lt v gt then select OK 48 ua Formatting the Card a vy sy Execute Format card in the following cases e The card is new e The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer The card is full with images
299. uilt in flash settings External flash func setting External flash C Fn setting Clear settings Clear settings Clear built in flash set Clear external flash set Clear ext flash C Fn set 222 MENU a 1 Display the Custom Function e With the camera ready to shoot with an external Speedlite select External flash C Fn setting then press lt 1 gt Set the Custom Function e Press the lt lt P gt key to select the function number then set the function The procedure is the same as setting the camera s Custom Functions p 296 1 Select Clear settings Under the B 1 Flash control tab select Clear settings then press lt G1 gt 2 Select the settings to be cleared Select Clear built in flash set Clear external flash set or Clear ext flash C Fn set then press lt G1 gt When you select OK the respective flash settings will be cleared a Automatic Sensor Cleaning mx Whenever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFFs the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor Normally you need not pay attention to this operation However you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any time or disable it Cleaning the Sensor Now Sr eS Select Sensor cleaning Screen color e Under the 3 tab select Sensor Feature guide Enable Touch consol Praba cleaning then press lt gt Sensor
300. unted on a tripod This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or long exposures e After taking self timer shots playing back the image p 84 to check focus and exposure is recommended e When using the self timer to shoot only yourself use focus lock p 61 on an object at about the same distance as where you will stand To cancel the self timer after it starts press the lt lt F gt button 106 y Using the Built in Flash mae In indoors low light or backlit conditions in daylight just raise the built in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures In the lt P gt mode the shutter speed 1 60 sec 1 200 sec will be set automatically to prevent camera shake 1 Press the lt 4 gt button In Creative Zone modes you can press the lt gt button anytime to take flash pictures e While the flash is recycling 4buSY is displayed in the viewfinder and BUSY 4 is displayed on the LCD monitor Press the shutter button halfway e Inthe bottom left of the viewfinder check that the lt 4 gt icon is lit 3 Take the picture When focus is achieved and you press the shutter button completely the flash will fire for the picture Effective Flash Range Approx in meters feet EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Brees EF S18 135mm 3 5 5 6 IS STM l Wide Angle Telephoto 1 3 7 3 3 12 1 1 2 3 3 3 7 5 1 5 3 3 3 17 4 3 3
301. ust the color density Note that night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise 154 Using Creative Filters a Toy camera effect Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image s four corners By adjusting the color tone you can change the color cast e amp Miniature effect Creates a diorama effect You can change where the image is to look sharp In step 5 you can press the lt gt button or tap on the screen to change the white frame s orientation horizontal vertical where you want the image to look sharp The AF method will be FlexiZone Single with the camera focusing the center of the white frame E e With Grainy B W the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will not look the same as the actual photo e With the Soft focus or Miniature effect the blur effect displayed on the LCD monitor may not look the same as the actual photo You can check the blur effect for the actual photo by pressing the depth of field preview button only in Creative Zone modes 155 Menu Function Settings m eae The menu options below are displayed HoomMHE fr Ff fF E f live View shoot Enable The functions settable on this menu AF method t Tracking screen only apply during Live View Continuous AF Enable Touch Shutter Disable shooting These functions do not take Grid display effect during viewfinder shooting
302. uto Lighting Optimizer if the checkmark lt v gt for Disable during man expo is removed it can be set in the lt M gt mode p 125 When ISO Auto is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed e After recomposing the picture you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 22 23 compared to when you pressed the lt gt button 4 Using the Built in Flash To obtain a correct flash exposure the flash output will be set automatically autoflash exposure to match the manually set aperture The shutter speed can be set from 1 200 sec to 30 sec or lt BULB gt BULB Bulb Exposures A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for C as long as you hold down the shutter button EP It can be used to photograph fireworks and es lt other subjects requiring long exposures S In step 3 on the preceding page turn the lt gt dial to the left to set lt BULB gt The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the LCD monitor cD e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual the image may look a little grainy When B3 Long exp noise reduction is set to Auto or Enable noise generated by the long exposure can b
303. utter button halfway the subject will be focused continuously e The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken When the AF point selection p 100 is automatic the camera first uses the center AF point to focus During autofocusing if the subject moves away from the center AF point focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point E With Al Servo AF the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved Also the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up 98 AF Changing the Autofocus Operation Al Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Operation Al Focus AF switches the AF operation from One Shot AF to Al Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving e After the subject is focused in One Shot AF operation if the subject starts moving the camera will detect the movement change the AF operation automatically to Al Servo AF and keep tracking the moving subject Fil When focus is achieved with Al Focus AF with the Servo operation active the beeper will continue beeping softly However the focus confirmation w light lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Note that focus will not be locked in this case 99 Selecting the AF Point memm In Basic Zone modes the camera will normally focus the closest subject automatically Therefore it may not always focus your target subject In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt
304. vdesvadet 182 Shooting Function Settings wadeccessiswiesedevenindcannarvsnteodevwnavdeedneenvayes 184 Setting the Movie recording Size sussssssrsrsrreresesesesseserorererrnens 185 Shooting Video Snapshoti cccceceseescenesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 Movie Menu Function SettingS ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeseeseesseseeeees 196 7 Handy Features 203 Handy POQUUIRCS feces erate EEn a AEE inter eae ant ta icroraty 204 Disabling the B pet ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeaaeaaeaaeneeees 204 Card Remind olarai a ecient tudes ata eaeanks 204 Setting the Image Review Time ccc eessscseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetes 204 Setting the Auto Power off Time ec cceceeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 205 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ceceeceeseeeeeeeeeteees 205 Creating and Selecting a Folder ccccccccssccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 206 File Numbering Methods ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseneaes 208 Setting Copyright INformationvscisminvieenca tins 210 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 212 Checking Camera Settings csssccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 213 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings eee 214 Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically 217 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color 217 Setting TGs AS Poa z cans onus vewtatdicensvuseu yueaean
305. ve View shooting are explained here Q Quick Control If you press the lt Q gt button while the image is displayed on the LCD monitor in a Creative Zone mode you can set any of the following AF method drive mode metering mode image recording quality built in flash settings white balance Picture Style Auto Lighting Optimizer and Creative filters In Basic Zone modes you can set the functions in bold and the settings shown in the table on page 76 1 Press the lt Q gt button gt The settable functions will be aE displayed ern LS 2 Select a function and set it r AF method a alee e Press the lt AV gt key to select a AFE AFCO APO AF Quick _ function The selected function and Feature guide p 52 will appear Press the lt lt gt gt key or turn the lt gt dial to change the setting e To set the drive mode s lt Wc gt setting or Picture Style parameters press the lt INFO gt button 3 Exit the setting e Press lt 1 gt to finalize the setting and return to Live View shooting e You can also select lt gt to return to Live View shooting Fl e In Creative Zone modes you can set the ISO speed by pressing the lt ISO gt button e For details on metering modes see page 117 151 Using Creative Filters mua While looking at the Live View screen you can shoot while applying a filter effect Grainy B W Soft focus Fish eye effect Art bold effect
306. ve filters 0 00 cc eeee 152 Face Tracking 159 FlexiZone Mullti cce 161 FlexiZone Single 162 Grid display 22 nrrtcccccaaaeseensenin 156 Information display 2 148 Manual focusing 103 170 Metering timet cceeeee 158 Possible shots eeee 147 Quick Control eeeee 151 QUICK MOUS nininraticcenecenasiwnnn 166 Long exposure noise reduction 127 Long exposures ceeeeees 116 C M Manual exposure 00 115 Macro photography 0ee 69 Magnified view c00 170 244 Malfunction oeJcisssscssssescpaereeeeeeecces 324 Manual exposure 115 177 Manual focus MPF 103 170 Manual reSet cccccccecesseseeees 209 Manual selection AF 0 100 Maximum DburSt c cccceeeee 89 90 Medium Image recording g alty hies ty cota eddtadcsen 22 278 Memory card Card MENU eeraa nee 46 My Menu nsnsi 303 Setting Procedure 00068 47 Settings san reir eee 318 MENU fete AAEE ST 4 Metering mode sssi 117 Metering timer 006 158 198 MF Manual focusing 103 170 Microphone 174 Miniature effect 155 276 Mirror lOCKUD eeeeeeeeees 142 300 Mode DIAM tncetccees somtusieroossveranceserad 24 Monochrome 000 77 96 134 MOVIE recta vsutiret a aeee rat 173 AF method l n 184
307. wfinder to check that the lt 4 gt icon is lit 2 Focus the subject 3 Press the lt gt button 416 Aim the spot metering circle over the subject then press the lt gt button gt The flash will fire a preflash and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory gt In the viewfinder FEL is displayed for a moment and lt gt will light up oe UG piety a eg Each time you press the lt gt button a oreflash is fired and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory Take the picture Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely gt The flash is fired when the picture is taken e If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash the lt gt icon will blink Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4 e FE lock cannot be used during Live View shooting 124 mE Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast m If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer The default setting is Standard With JPEG images the correction is done when the image is captured In Basic Zone modes Standard is set automatically E Select Auto Lighting Optimizer Expo comp AEB 2 1 1 12 Under the 2 tab select Auto Ay hting Optimizer 1 i Fee a ete a Lighting Optimizer then
308. will focus again The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult If this happens exit Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source When FlexiZone Multi is set and you press the lt gt button or tap lt Q gt on the screen the center of the selected zone or image center with automatic selection will be magnified If you press the shutter button halfway the display will return to normal and the camera will focus When FlexiZone Single is set and you press the lt gt button or tap lt Q gt on the screen the area covered by the AF point will be magnified Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in the magnified view This is effective when the camera is attached to a tripod and you need to attain very precise focus If focusing is difficult in the magnified view return to the normal display and use AF Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views If you magnify the view after focusing with FlexiZone Multi or FlexiZone Single in the normal view it may not look focused If 1 Tracking is set magnified view is not possible F e f you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus aim the center AF point or zone over the subject to focus focus again and then take the picture e The AF assist beam will no
309. with certain subjects such as the following Very low contrast subjects Example Blue sky solid color walls etc Subjects in very low light e Extremely backlit or reflective subjects Example Car with a highly reflective body etc e Near and far subjects covered by an AF point Example Animal in a cage etc e Repetitive patterns Example Skyscraper windows computer keyboards etc In such cases do either of the following 1 With One Shot AF focus an object at the same distance as the subject and lock the focus before recomposing p 61 2 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and focus manually F For subjects difficult to focus during Live View shooting with Tracking FlexiZone Multi or FlexiZone Single see page 165 MF Manual Focusing 1 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt Focus the subject e Focus by turning the lens focusing Tas rMF bree ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder F If you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing the AF point achieving focus will light up briefly in red the beeper will sound and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will light up 103 Continuous Shooting m You can shoot up to approx 5 shots per second This is effective for shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial expressions Press the lt lt gt button Q 1 x S
310. with the corresponding filter applied A Adjust the filter effect e Press the lt lt P gt key to adjust the filter effect then press lt gt e For the Miniature effect press the lt AV gt key and select the image area within the white frame where you want the image to look sharp Then press lt G1 gt i 274 Applying Creative Filters to the Image eee 5 Save the image Select OK to save the image Check the destination folder and image file number then select OK tripi Chat 1 7 NEIE T ER Ei T a ig j f m f oy A 3 pete ec ae che leant fie e To apply a filter to another image Cancel OK repeat steps 2 to 5 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu Fil When shooting EM AL or images the Creative filter will be applied to the image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image If an aspect ratio is set for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the image the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set Creative Filter Characteristics amp Grainy B W Makes the image grainy and black and white By adjusting the contrast you can change the black and white effect e Soft focus Gives the image a soft look By adjusting the blur you can change the degree of softness 2 5 Applying Creative Filters to the Image eee lt Fish eye effect Gives the effect of a fish eye lens The image will have a barrel type distortion
311. x display press lt amp gt to switch to the single image display 3 In the single image display press lt 61 gt gt The movie playback panel will appear at the bottom of the screen Tap x Play back the movie gt A EA e Select gt Play then press lt G gt gt The movie will start playing e You can pause the movie playback by pressing lt gt e During movie playback you can turn the lt gt dial to adjust the built in speaker s sound volume For more details on the playback procedure see the next page Speaker QD The camera might not be able to play movies shot by another camera 254 Playing Movies Movie Playback Panel Playback Description gt Play Pressing lt gt toggles between play and stop Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the lt lt P gt key The I gt Slow motion slow motion speed is indicated at the upper right of the screen M4 First frame Displays the movie s first frame Each time you press lt gt the previous frame is displayed If you hold down lt gt it will rewind the movie Each time you press lt gt the movie will play frame by frame If you hold down lt 1 gt it will fast forward the movie gt gt Last frame Displays the movie s last frame Jd Background es back a movie with the selected background music music p 261 Displays the
312. y it may take some time for the printing to start after you select Print e If image tilt correction p 287 is applied it may take longer to print the image e To stop the printing press lt gt while Stop is displayed then select OK f you execute Clear all camera settings p 214 all the settings will revert to their defaults 285 Printing Adjustment of Printing Effects ee Natural M In step 4 on page 284 select the printing a rr INFO Jed effect When the lt gt icon is displayed ee W 1 copies brightly next to lt INZ gt you can press the lt INFO gt button You can then adjust ones the printing effect What can be adjusted Adjust levels Off or what is displayed will depend on the Brightener Off BEIE ofi selection made in step 4 PrintEffect Natural i e Brightness The image brightness can be adjusted e Adjust levels When you select Manual you can change Adjust levels the histogram s distribution and adjust the 3o Bt image s brightness and contrast irn er a With the Adjust levels screen displayed press the lt INFO gt button to change the position of a the lt gt Press the lt lt P gt key to freely adjust the shadow level 0 127 or highlight level 128 255 e g Brightener Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject s face look dark When On is set the face will be brightened for printing e Red eye corr Effect
313. y to select the 2 tab e Press the lt AV gt key to select Date Time then press lt gt tE Setting the Time Zone Date and Time S SE Date Time 3 Set the date and time Press the lt lt gt gt key to select the 02 28 2013 15 30 00 date or time number mmddyy 3 Press lt i gt so lt gt is displayed e Press the lt AV gt key to set the Cancel number then press lt gt Returns E to lt gt Date Time A Set the daylight saving time Set it if necessary 02 28 2013 15 30 00 e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select 3 N Fs Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed z Press the lt AF gt key to select 38 Cancel then press lt gt When the daylight saving time is set to lt the time set in step 3 will advance by 1 hour If 3 is set the daylight saving time will be canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour Date Time 5 Exit the setting Press the lt lt P gt key to select OK 02 28 2013 15 30 00 then press lt 6 gt mm dd yy ie gt The date time and daylight saving time will be set and the menu will ox Cancel reappear 4 If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera s battery becomes exhausted the time zone and date time may be reset If this happens set the time zone and date time again E The date time that was set will start from when you press lt gt in s
314. y to select the video snapshot you PB Piey snapenol want to play then press lt gt 194 qt Delete snapshot M4 Shooting Video Snapshots 0000 3 Save the edited album e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to a ae m _ the Editing panel at the screen s na i bottom e Press the lt lt gt gt key to select LR Save then press lt gt gt The save screen will appear e To save it as anew movie select New file To save it and overwrite the original movie file select Overwrite then press lt gt Q e f the card does not have enough free space New file will not be available e When the battery level is low editing albums is not possible Use a fully charged battery ir Provided Software Usable with Albums e EOS Video Snapshot Task Editing aloums is possible This is an add on function for ImageBrowser EX 195 mm Movie Menu Function Settings mam When you set the power switch to lt gt the D 1 D 2 tab will show functions dedicated to movie shooting The menu options are as follows Om 1 menu Om 2 menu TT Cone G pe p d d daN Er a h a i AF method T Tracking Movie rec size 1920x1080 Ra Movie Servo AF Enable Sound recording Auto AF wi shutter button during ON Video snapshot Disable Grid display Off Metering timer 16 Sec e AF method The AF methods are the same as described on pages 159 165 You can select X Tracking FlexiZone Multi
315. you can touch with your fingers for playback operations Press the lt gt gt button to play back images Browsing Images Swipe with one finger e With the single image display use one finger to swipe the image to the left or right to see another image Swipe to the left to see the next newer image or swipe to the right to see the previous older image e With the index display use one finger to scroll up or down the screen to display another screen of index images Swipe your finger up to see newer images or swipe your finger down to see the older images When you select an image and tap it it will be displayed as a single image Jump adh Images Jump Display Swipe with two fingers When you use two fingers to swipe left or right on the screen you can jump through images with the method set in Image jump w 7 under the gt 12 tab 245 Playing Back with the Touch Screen Reduce Image Index Display Pinch two fingers Touch the screen with two fingers spread apart and pinch your fingers together on the screen e Each time you pinch your fingers the screen changes from a single image display to a 4 image index display and 9 image index display Spreading two fingers on the screen will reverse this operation e The selected image is highlighted ina blue frame When you tap the selected image it will be displayed as a single image Magnify Image Spread two fingers apart

here

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents